Wasp Barcode Technologies InventoryControl User manual

- When you first log on to InventoryControl, you will use Admin as the user name and

1.3 Using the Sample Company

The Sample Company contains a set of data you can use to learn about InventoryControl. You can practice working with the features and functions contained in the software using this data.

You can enter information into the Sample Company; however, when upgrading to a new version, this data will be lost. It is very important that you do not enter any information into the Sample Company that you do not want to lose. The Sample Company is meant for training purposes only and should not be used as your working database.

Accessing and Using the Sample Company

On the Log In screen, login as usual, making sure you select the Use Sample Database checkbox.

InventoryControl opens with InventoryControl - Wasp Inventory Sample Inc. displayed in the title bar.

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can use the software as normal once logged in. You can create additional items and add inventory, check inventory in and out, create purchase orders and pick orders, etc. On reports, the company name and each address line will be followed by "trial". Mobile devices are not supported by the sample database.

1.4 Set Up Cycle Overview

After you finish installing your software (using the InventoryControl Quick Start Guide as a reference) you will need to set up your system by entering information into the software. This is referred to as a "cycle" because in multi-warehouse installations you will need to repeat steps 3-7 for each site. The set up process may take hours or even days depending on the size of your organization. While this may seem overwhelming, keep in mind that the return on this time investment will pay off quickly. These steps will result in a complete and accurate count of inventory that will allow you to start using InventoryControl to manage your day-to-day business.

Keep in mind that you can continue to use your previous inventory tracking software while you are setting up InventoryControl. The transition to InventoryControl should take place when you are ready to count your inventory and enter the counts into the software.

Before starting this process, set aside a day or two when you can stop using the old system and transition over to InventoryControl. The audit, or inventory counting, step must be done when you are not receiving or shipping goods. Plan to perform the audit on a weekend or after hours, for example.

Set Up Cycle:

1. Design your barcode labeling system and designate barcode label ranges.

Import or input sites, locations, suppliers, manufacturers and customers into

InventoryControl.

Print barcodes and label sites and locations.

Import or input items, making sure to designate additional tracking needs like serial number or lot.

Use your handheld or a report to do a complete inventory audit.

Using the audit results, print barcode labels for items and label every item.

7. Determine the best method of handheld use for your company and implement it.

If the initial setup process seems daunting, there are organizations that specialize in evaluating your needs and setting up your warehouse for you using InventoryControl. If you need to find an organization in your area to help with this process, please call Wasp Support and we will help you find an integrator.

InventoryControl Printable Help

1.5 Step One - Create Users

Add Admin User

leave the password blank. This default user profile gives you access to everything in the system. The first step you should take upon logging in is to create at least one additional admin user (Administration

> Security). The new admin user should have rights to all areas of the system. You should also change the password for the default admin profile. Since the default admin's password is initially blank, it is important to change the password to prevent other users from logging in under this profile.

1.6 Step Two - Enter Company Information

Enter Company Information

- Next you should enter your company's information (Administration >

Company Info). On the Company Information screen you will enter your company's name and any addresses needed for receiving, shipping, corporate correspondence, etc. The company name you enter on this screen will appear on all reports and in the title bar of InventoryControl. In addition, if you have the Pro or Enterprise version of InventoryControl, the company name and addresses you enter will appear on Pick Orders and Purchase Orders created in the system.

When you set up your company information, you should enter all addresses to which you might receive inventory, ship inventory, store inventory as well as your corporate address and other business addresses. Having these addresses entered will save you and your employees a lot of time when creating purchase orders and pick orders and when moving, picking, receiving, adding and removing inventory.

1.7 Step Three - Define Sites and Locations

Define Sites

and

Define Locations

- Now you are ready to begin entering sites and locations into the

database. Locations are the areas into which you will assign inventory, while sites contain the various locations. Usually a site is a warehouse or other building, but it can be an office, a truck, a field, etc.

We suggest creating one site for each building or structure that contains inventory. InventoryControl requires that you define at least one site containing at least one location. You can also have multiple sites that contain multiple locations. There is no limit to the number of locations you can assign to a site.

Note: WaspNest Inventory only supports one Site.

A location is typically shorthand for a physical place such as a shelf in your warehouse. Commonly used conventions include Location codes like this:

01 02 05 (for Row #, Shelf #, Bin #)

For the purposes of keeping track of your inventory items, your locations should represent the placement within the site. If your site is a warehouse, the locations are shelves or racks. If your site is a building, the locations may be offices. If you have a fleet of trucks, the locations may be containers in the truck.

When deciding how to label each location, choose a numbering scheme that can be interpreted when reading just the label. For example, if you have 7 rows of 5 shelves each and each shelf has four levels, your barcode label scheme should look like A010200 or row A, shelf 01, level 02, bin 00. If you have inventory on trucks in containers, the truck can be a site and each bin in the truck is a location. Put a barcode label on the inside of the truck door so the person moving inventory into or out of the truck can just scan and move. The barcode label should have the barcode and the human readable text

InventoryControl Printable Help

description of the location as well.

A distribution business, for example, typically places inventory at a specific location in one or more warehouses. InventoryControl requires that you define at least one Site containing at least one Location.

If you have multiple warehouses, you can set each one up as a Site, then create multiple locations within each site to represent the specific areas where you will be storing inventory. For instance, you might setup a Site as Warehouse 1 containing Locations Shelf 1, Shelf 2 and Shelf 3.

A fleet business might define each vehicle as a Site with multiple Locations (bins, for example) within each vehicle. In this case you could setup a Site as Vehicle 1 with Locations of Bin1, Bin2 and Bin3. Or each vehicle could be a single Location operating out of one or more Sites. For example, the Site might be Docking 1 with locations of Vehicle 1, Vehicle 2, etc.

A retail business might have multiple Locations at one Site or multiple Locations within each of several

Sites. InventoryControl has the flexibility to be configured however it best suits your business needs.

Remember that though you must have at least one site containing one location, you could have multiple sites that contain multiple locations. There is no limit to the number of locations you can assign to a site.

It is important to note that you can have the same Location code defined at more than one Site - for instance, Warehouse 1 and Warehouse 2 may each have Location codes of Shelf 1 - so always pay attention to which Site you are working with when performing Inventory transactions.

Setting up your locations now will allow you to just pick a location from a list when you begin adding inventory later. It is possible, however, to define locations as you add inventory. If you would prefer to do

this, skip to

Step 6 - Enter Suppliers

If you already have location information contained in another database, you may want to use

InventoryControl's Import function rather than manually entering in this information.

For additional information on formatting your Location numbers and descriptions, please refer to the topic

Barcode Best Practices

1.8 Step Four - Add Users

Add Users

- You should enter all users who will be using the system and you can assign specific rights to each user that limit their activities to certain functions. It is a good idea to give each user his or her own user name and password rather than sharing a single user profile, as this allows you to keep track of who performs specific functions in the system. InventoryControl keeps a detailed transaction history of every action performed in the software. Each time an item is added, removed, moved, etc., the transaction is logged by InventoryControl and is listed with the user name of the person who performed the transaction, the date/time of the transaction and the type of transaction on the Transaction List (Main Screen >

Lists > Transaction List).

- If you have set up more than one location and you will be using a mobile device

InventoryControl Printable Help

1.9 Step Five - Print Location Labels

Print Location Labels

with an integrated barcode scanner, it is a good idea to create Location labels for each location you have entered into the system. This allows you to quickly scan a barcode label when auditing or adjusting inventory at that location or when adding, removing, picking or receiving inventory to or from that location.

For ideas and examples of how to configure your labels, click here.

You can print labels automatically after creating your locations or you can

print from the Location List

After printing your labels, attach them to each location. For example, if your locations are shelves, attach a label to each shelf to identify it.

1.10 Step Six - Enter Suppliers

Enter Suppliers

- Suppliers are those businesses or individuals from which you will be obtaining your inventory. Your business might require that each Item in your inventory have an associated supplier. You can have one supplier or many providing you with inventory.

If you already have supplier information contained in another database, you may want to use

InventoryControl's Import function rather than manually entering in this information.

- If you have chosen to import your suppliers or manually enter all suppliers

1.11 Step Seven - Print the Supplier Report

Print the Supplier Report

prior to adding items, you should print and review the Supplier Report to make sure all the information was entered correctly. To run the Supplier Report, from the Main screen, select the Reports icon. On

the

Select Report

screen, double click Supplier Report.

1.12 Step Eight - Create Items

Create Items

- Items represent the actual material or good that you will have in your inventory. The item is a classification that contains information such as manufacturer, suppliers, a description of the item and unit of measure information. The item is not part of your inventory until you add quantity to it and specify a location for it. For example, you might create an Item entry for Mouse - Wireless. Then you can add inventory, or quantity, to that item at a specific location.

On the Create New Item screen, you can assign the item to multiple locations and even designate one location as the primary location for this item. The primary location will then pre-populate the screen when removing, adding, receiving (Pro and Enterprise Version Only) and picking (Pro and Enterprise Version

Only) this item.

If you are using the Enterprise or Professional version of InventoryControl, you can also create items that are non-inventory. This is useful if you need to create an item for marketing pamphlets, counter displays or anything you need to have on-hand but don't necessarily want to include in your inventory amounts. In

addition, you can create Kit or Assembly Items. Please refer to the topics

Assembly Overview

and

Kitting Overview

for more information.

InventoryControl Printable Help

If you already have item information contained in another database, you may want to use

InventoryControl's Import function rather than manually entering in this information. For more information

on importing locations, please refer to the topic

Importing Into the Database

- Labels can be printed directly from InventoryControl via the

1.13 Step Nine - Print Item Labels

Print Item Labels

Item List

screen,

at the time a new Item is created

or you can access Wasp Labeler to edit or create new labels.

1.14 Step Ten - Add Inventory

Add Inventory

- Now that your items have been created, you are ready to add inventory, or quantity to

those items at specific locations. Adding inventory is often referred to as receiving inventory. You can think of this step as stocking the InventoryControl program with the inventory that is in your warehouse.

Remember that inventory is not the same thing as items, even though inventory is made of items.

Adding inventory to an item means you are adding quantity to that item.

When you are adding inventory, you will enter information specific to your inventory such as Location,

Quantity, and Cost as well as specific tracked by information such as serial number, date codes and pallet codes. Each time you add inventory for an Item, the transaction is stored separately in

InventoryControl allowing for multiple Locations and cost averaging.

If you already have inventory information contained in another database, you may want to use

InventoryControl's Import function rather than manually entering in this information.

A Note on Importing Inventory

If you choose to import your inventory you

MUST run a backup of your system BEFORE you import the inventory data. Name the backup file something that indicates it was run immediately prior to importing inventory so you can easily identify it if needed later. If you find errors on your import file after you import inventory, you will need to restore this backup to return the system to the pre-import state (your other information will be there). After restoring, you can fix the import file as needed and reimport. ****DO NOT re-import after you have

already imported inventory without first

restoring the backup.**** Re-importing over existing inventory data will add more inventory to your items rather than fixing problem data.

Congratulations! You are now on your way to populating your inventory database. To add more

Items to your database, just return to Step 4 to setup your new Item, then Add your inventory for that

Item.

InventoryControl Printable Help

1.15 Step Eleven - Print the Inventory by Location Report

Print the Inventory by Location Report

- Printing the Inventory Location Report will allow you to check

that your inventory has been entered correctly.

After you have added your inventory you are ready to begin using InventoryControl. Now you can setup your mobile devices, if needed, and begin keeping track of your inventory.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 2 - Introductory Materials

2.1 Barcode Best Practices

In InventoryControl, when you are asked for a number to identify sites, customers, items, locations etc., you should always use a short sequential set of numbers or numbers and characters. Enter the full text description of the site or location in the description field, not the number field. These numbers can then be printed as a barcode and used to scan locations into mobile devices. You should estimate the largest number of sites or locations you will have and pick a range of numbers that are reserved for each. For instance, if you have up to 60 sites, you should reserve 100 to 199 for your sites. Each new site you enter will get a number from this range. If you want to more closely tie the number to the site, add a one or two letter designation to the end of the site number.

For example, use 100US to designate the main US warehouse and 101UK for the warehouse in the

United Kingdom. If you expect to have a few hundred suppliers, reserve 1000 to 2000 for suppliers.

Manufacturers can have 500 to 599. Items should start at 20000. This range reservation serves two purposes. First, it allows those who know the ranges to easily distinguish a designation for the warehouse from the designation for an item if all they see is a barcode on a paper or a box. Second, reserving a range of numbers makes the process of deciding what number to use for new designations much easier. If you add a manufacturer and you already used 512, the next is 513. For example, if a stray box is presented to the warehouse manager and she sees barcodes with 100US C050100, she knows this box was stocked in the US warehouse on row C shelf 05 bin 01.00. The box may also have a barcode with 20104 which she knows is the item number and can be used to put the item back into inventory. Without these barcodes, the box might have to be opened to identify the item and then someone would have to track where it came from and where to put it away.

Another thing to consider when creating your numeric representation for locations and items is that some devices only support a reduced set of characters. Some mobile devices, such as the WDT2200, do not have a keyboard that can support lower case letters or the entire range of special characters. With these devices, if your item number is 10000(1) you will not be able to type the item number or scan in the number from a barcode because the parentheses character is not supported. All o

Our internal barcode labels use Code 128 which supports both lower and upper case characters, all numbers and many special characters.

InventoryControl uses the symbology called Code 128 for all the pre-built labels. All the scanners and mobile devices Wasp supplies can read Code 128. Best practices suggest you use Code 128 because it supports all numbers, upper and lower case characters and most special characters. It also reduces the size of most common barcodes.

InventoryControl Printable Help

2.2 What is a Barcode?

A barcode is a graphical representation of a set of numeric or alphanumeric characters that can be read by a barcode scanner.

123 becomes: .

Whse1 becomes: .

Assigning a permanent barcode to each site, location, item, supplier and customer creates an environment where a mobile device can be used to easily keep track of inventory movements and alleviates the problem of data-entry errors.

Barcodes get wider with the amount of numbers and characters you want represented by them. A barcode's width is determined by the amount of numbers or characters represented by the barcode.

Some barcode scanners have a limited width that they can read. If you have very long item numbers or location numbers you may need to reconsider the numbering scheme or the scanner you are using. Also be aware that many of the less expensive barcode readers do not read barcodes that are bent, at an angle, too small or damaged. Consider the possible disposition of your barcodes before choosing a scanner.

There are many different barcode formats or symbologies. The different symbologies can be though of as different fonts. The same characters are represented by different symbologies in different ways. For example, the two symbologies below represent the same information (Whse1).

These different formats exist to provide ways to compress more data into smaller space, to represent a different set of characters or to enable scanning at different angles or distances. InventoryControl uses the symbology called Code 128 for all the pre-built labels. All the scanners and mobile devices Wasp supplies can read Code 128. Best practices suggest you use Code 128 because it supports all numbers, upper and lower case characters and most special characters. It also reduces the size of most common barcodes.

Barcodes should be printed using a barcode printer or, if you are using Wasp Labeler, using a high quality laser or ink jet printer. You want the barcode label to be high quality because low quality barcodes are

InventoryControl Printable Help

harder to scan and usually do not last long. InventoryControl is bundled with Wasp Labeler, which can print to a regular printer or a barcode printer. Remember to keep plenty of extra label stock and printer ribbons to make sure you never run out. To determine how to best provide good quality labels for daily use, consider the kind of printer you are using.

2.3 Choosing a Label Printer

Organizations that have several hundred new inventory items a week will need to have a dedicated barcode label printer at each site. They should use a good quality label media and use the feature built into InventoryControl that automatically prints inventory tags as soon as the item is received on the PC.

The printer needs to be rates for several hundred labels a day and needs to print fast enough to avoid costly slowdowns that can be caused when waiting to put away items after they are received because the labels are not printed. Look for models that can print 4-6 inches per second and can handle media up to

4" wide. Wasp's WPL606 line of printers work well in warehouse conditions.

Many organizations will not need a high-end printer but will still save money and will get better quality long-lasting labels if they use a desktop barcode label printer. These printers allow you to print one or a hundred labels without waste and they are quicker and cheaper than using a standard printer. Wasp's

WPL305 line of printers work great for smaller volumes of printing.

A laser printer using standard sheets of labels may work great where product turnover is slow, conditions are well-controlled or new items are not added often. In this case, use the included Labeler software to indicate what label stock is being used. Labeler ships with many standard label templates pre-configured.

Pre-print a few pages more than what you have in stock to prepare for new items.

InventoryControl Printable Help

2.4 Designing and Labeling Sites and Locations

2.4.1 What is a Site?

The term Site is used to describe any grouping of locations where you plan to store and track inventory.

Usually a site is a warehouse building but it can be an office, a truck or a field, etc.

Site design may be simple if your entire inventory is stored your two warehouses. If this is the case you can just use the name of the warehouse as the site description. Use a simple site number like W100 in case you ever need to type the site number into a handheld device. For the site number you can use any easily identifiable information about the site like its address or its designation like 140010th or W1400.

Since this product only has two levels of location tracking, you need to design your sites to describe all the levels above the actual physical location of the inventory.

If you have trucks that are tied to a warehouse you can make their site description a composite of the warehouse and truck number, W1400T12. If you have a different buildings containing various rooms in which items will be stored, make a composite name of the building and room number, B201R10. You should always make the site number something that can be barcoded so that it can be printed and

scanned. See

Barcode Best Practices

2.4.2 What is a Location?

For the purpose of keeping track of your inventory items, your locations should represent the placement within the site. If your site is a warehouse, the locations are shelves or racks. If your site is a building, the locations may be offices. If you have a fleet of trucks, the locations may be containers in the truck.

When deciding how to label each location, choose a numbering scheme that can be interpreted when reading just the label. For example, if you have 7 rows of 5 shelves each and each shelf has 4 levels, your barcode label scheme should look like A010200 or Row A, Shelf 01, Level 02, Bin 00. If you have inventory on trucks in containers, the truck can be a site and each bin in the truck is a location. Each bin should get a numeric location designation like 100, 200 or 200. If you do not have locations within the truck, each truck can be a location: T1, T2, T3. Put a label on the inside of the truck door so the person moving inventory into the truck can just scan and move. The label barcode should have the barcode and the human readable text description of the location as well.

2.4.3 Labeling Sites and Locations

Every location where inventory can be stored in your warehouse should have a printed barcode securely attached near the location. This is important because adding, removing or moving inventory using the

InventoryControl software requires a location. All processes that require a location are both sped up and made more accurate if you use a barcode to identify each location. Also using a consistent numbering scheme makes finding items in the warehouse much easier. These labels can be stuck to the frame of the shelves, attached to the bin, put on a card and hung from the racks or even stuck to the floor as in the example below:

The first step for designing your labels is to decide on what type of label to print the barcode. A variety of barcode label stock exists that can withstand any environment. There are two kinds of barcode label

InventoryControl Printable Help

printers. Thermal transfer printers that work like an ink jet or laser printers that print by transferring ink from a ribbon to the label paper (stock). Direct Thermal printers do not have a ribbon but use heat to print onto a special label stock. The thermal transfer printers are more expensive to operate but can print on a wider array of label stock and the labels last longer in various kinds of environments. Direct thermal labels are cheaper but may fade if exposed to friction, heat or direct sunlight. Most barcode printers will print both thermal transfer and direct thermal. You want a printer that will do both because what you are using the label for will determine if you should use thermal transfer or the direct thermal. You may need both kinds of labels available for printing.

For all kinds of organizations, you may want to consider using the cheaper direct thermal labels for identifying individual items because you will put them on the packaging of items that will be discarded by the consumer or on item tags used to identify the item at removal time. Use the cheaper label stock when it will be used and discarded. It is often cheaper to reprint a few labels on the cheaper stock if one label is damaged than to use the more expensive stock. You should label your warehouse locations with labels that will last and can take some abuse because you don't want to have to continually reprint and replace these labels.

If your labels contain information you want to be permanent, such as serial numbers, you should use thermal transfer labels on a high quality label stock or, perhaps, polypropoline and a resin ribbon. The importance of the label will determine what stock it is printed on. A serial number that you use for returns or contract maintenance needs to be readable for a long time.

If your labels will be exposed to heat because of the device they are attached to or through exposure to the sun you should use thermal transfer labels. For most locations ina fleet vehicle you should use thermal transfer.

If the majority of your labels are disposable any cheap stock will work fine. Often the major issue is how to apply the label to the item so that the scanner can read the barcode. Make sure the barcode is attached to a flat surface in a place w here it will not get scratched or damaged.

Before you label your locations you need to come up with a numbering scheme for each location and item. In InventoryControl there are two fields that describe where the item is: Site and Locations.

InventoryControl Printable Help

2.5 Identifying Tracking Needs

Sometimes it is important to be able to associate an exact item or range of items with an exact customer, serial number, date code or shipment date. This can be important for support and maintenance purposes or for recalls. Often larger cost items that have a warranty or support contract are tracked by serial number so that if the item is sent back for maintenance you can be sure you are not fixing a product that is out of warranty. Some items need to be tracked by lot or date code because the batch they are in is important or they are perishable.

InventoryControl allows you to specify up to four required tracking fields (Serial Number, Lot, Date Code and Pallet) and three optional tracking fields (PO, Supplier and Customer). Selecting a tracking field means that when you process an add, remove, move, audit, pick or receive for this item you will be forced to specify a value for the tracking fields you specified. The three optional tracking fields are always available when Adding and Removing items and can be filled out as needed. You can also select to make these optional fields required on the

Create New Item

screen. When you select to use one of the

optional fields by selecting it on the Create New Item screen the field becomes required for that item. You can select tracking fields on the Edit Item screen as long as no inventory has been added to the item.

Serial Number is the most common and is different from the rest of the tracking fields. Serial Numbers must be unique for each piece of inventory. When an item is tracked by serial number, a unique serial number must be entered for each individual piece of that item you enter into inventory. When the item is removed or moved, the system will also require the serial number. This allows the location and movement of the item to be tracked exactly. The other tracking fields are not required to be unique. If you are tracking by lot you could add 100 items with lot number 206.

Date Code is used if the item has an expiration date or production date that is important for recalls or tracking. Do not use the Date Code field to track when an item is added to InventoryControl. Each Add transaction in InventoryControl is time-stamped to allow you to track when an item was added. To track when an item is added, view the

Transaction List

(Main Screen > Lists > Transactions) or run the

Transaction Report

There are also three optional tracking fields: PO, Supplier and Customer. As mentioned above, these fields are special fields for the Add and Remove functions that can be filled out but are not required unless you make them required when the item is created.

The required and optional track by fields can be renamed to reflect the names you use. For more

information, please refer to the topic

Editing Field Names

After inventory is added to an item, the selections you made to the four tracking fields cannot be changed without first removing all inventory from that item.

Tracking Fields Best Practices:

 Make sure you specify what you want to track before adding inventory.

 Make sure you print a label for each track by field you have selected to use and attach them to each item. If the labels are not physically attached to each item, it will be very difficult for you to keep track of which items should be tracked by a specific field.

InventoryControl Printable Help

2.6 Labeling Items

Just as every location should have a barcode, each individual piece of inventory needs a barcode. You should print your item numbers on labels and put them on each individual item before they are put away on a shelf. You get the same time saving and accuracy benefits from labeling inventory items as you get from labeling the locations, but on a greater scale. Sometimes it is not feasible to have a label on each piece of inventory because the item is too small. In this case, put the item's barcode on the container in which the item is stored on the shelf. The label should have the item name as well as a number representing the item encoded as a barcode as in the example shown below:

It is important not to use a text description or abbreviation as the item number because a numbering scheme is more flexible and easier to encode to a small barcode. Most labeling software can be set up to use a number for the barcode and to print the description or item name under the barcode.

InventoryControl allows you to print your item barcodes as the inventory comes in or

pre-print barcodes from the Item List

screen to apply.

If you pick a numbering scheme and stick to it you will find that you start to recognize the numbers as easily as the names. The specific numbering scheme you use to identify the items can start at 1000 and count up, if that is what you want. Some companies assign all or part of the SKU number they are issued as the item number. Because item models may change over time or sub-models may become available, you may need to use a numbering scheme that can adapt without losing the item's identity. Many companies allow gaps in the numbering scheme to allow for this growth and for changes. For instance, one item number is 19500 and another is 19600. When an optional feature is added to the 19500, it is assigned 19510 since both are kept in inventory. The 19600 item is discontinue and another model takes its place and is assigned 19601. This way, the 195xx line of products is maintained and are easily identified with each other.

Recommended Barcode Ranges

Sites

Barcode Label

Manufacturers

Suppliers

Items

Range

100-199

500-599

1000-2000

20000 and up

InventoryControl Printable Help

2.7 Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing FAQ

What cost methods are used by InventoryControl?

InventoryControl provides four costing options:

 Moving Average - When this method is used, the average cost of a particular item is recalculated based on each purchase.

Example: You purchased 100 computers for $500 each. When you have 10 computers left in stock, you purchase 100 more, but now your cost for the computers is $600 each.

InventoryControl will calculate the cost of this item as following:

Cost of original computers = 10 x 500 = $5,000

Cost of new computers = 100 x 600 = $60,000

The combined cost of all of the computers is $65,000

Average cost of all of this type of computer that you have in inventory (110 computers) is 65,000

/ 110 = 590.91

 First-In, First-Out (FIFO) - When this method is used, the inventory that is added first is removed first.

Example: If you added or received 50 Barcode Laser Scanners on the 1st, 8th and 15th, you would end up with 150 scanners. If on the 17th you remove 60 scanners, all of the scanners that came in on the 1st and 10 scanners from the 8th would be removed because the scanners on the

1st were first in and, therefore, will be first out. Next to be removed would be scanners from the

8th.

This also is how the average cost is calculated. If the scanners on the 1st cost $300 each and the scanners on the 8th and 15th cost $320 and $315 each, the average cost on the 16th would be $311.67.

50 scanners x $300 = $15,000 (from the 1st)

50 scanners x $320 = $16,000 (from the 8th)

50 scanners x $315 = $15,750 (from the 15th)

------------

$46,500 / 150 = $311.67 average cost

On the 17th you removed 60 scanners so the average cost will become:

40 scanners x $320 = $12,800 (from the 8th)

50 scanners x $315 = $15,750 (from the 15th)

-----------

$28,550 / 90 = $317.23 average cost

Inventory valuation is calculated by multiplying the quantity by the average price. The inventory value on the 16th is $46,000 or 150 x $311.67. After 60 are removed the inventory value is

$28,550 or $317.23 x 90.

 Last-In, First-Out (LIFO) - When this method is used, the inventory that is added last (most recently) is removed first.

InventoryControl Printable Help

50 scanners x $300 = $15,000 (from the 1st)

50 scanners x $320 = $16,000 (from the 8th)

50 scanners x $315 = $15,750 (from the 15th)

------------

$46,500 / 150 = $311.67 average cost

On the 17th you removed 60 scanners so the average cost will become:

40 scanners x $320 = $12,800 (from the 8th)

50 scanners x $300 = $15,000 (from the 1st)

-----------

$27,800 / 90 = $308.89 average cost

 Legacy Method (the method used in previous versions of InventoryControl) - This is the method used in previous versions of InventoryControl. The legacy method uses FIFO and manages cost by location and track by level.

How do I determine my Stocking Unit?

The quantity of an item on all screens and reports is counted using the Stocking Unit you specify or eaches (ea.) if you do not specify a unit. The stocking unit can be entered for each item on the New or

Edit Item screen's Additional tab (shown below):

When you enter the stocking unit, you need to pick the smallest unit of measure that you will ever use to remove a whole item. A good test to use when deciding what the stocking unit should be is to ask yourself how you count and refer to one unit. Think about what your answer would be if you were asked to count how many of this item you have. If the answer is 100 feet of rope, for example, "feet" or "ft" is the stocking unit. If the answer is 20 scanners, then "ea" is the stocking unit because "each" is common when the unit itself is not a standard unit of measure. If the answer is 100 boxes or nails, then "box" or

"bx" is the stocking unit.

InventoryControl Printable Help

We will address what you do if you remove in partial quantities or purchase the item in larger quantities than the stocking unit later in this topic.

What is the Cost for my item?

When you input cost for an item into the New or Edit Item screen, the cost is your cost for purchasing one of the stocking units. If one barcode laser scanner costs $300 you would enter 300 into the cost field.

If you remove fractional quantities of an item, the cost should still be for one whole stocking unit. Let's use rope as an example. Normally the rope is sold in increments of a foot so the Stocking Unit is ft. Each foot costs $0.12 making the cost 12 cents. Continuing the rope example, assume that exact multiples of feet are rarely sold. In this case you could change the stocking unit to inches since that is the lowest unit or measure. Since InventoryControl does not do the math for you when determining the quantity you are adding and the cost at add time, you should choose one that makes it easiest for you to add and remove.

Regardless of the stocking unit you choose, the cost should be entered for one whole stocking unit.

How is Cost handled when I Add Inventory on the PC?

When inventory is added on the PC, it is assigned a cost for each 1 unit. If you add 20 scanners in the

Add screen, the cost will automatically default to the Item Cost (the cost you entered on the New or Edit

Item screen > General tab).

InventoryControl Printable Help

If your cost for this add is different from the cost on the item record, you can change the cost on the Add screen to represent the actual cost.

For example, if you purchased these 20 scanners for a discount, change the Cost on the Add screen before you add the items. In the example below, the user received a $50.00 discount on the whole order for ordering 20 scanners so the Cost entered on the Add screen should be $297.50.

20 scanners x $300 = $6,000 - $50 = $5,950 / 20 scanners = $297.50 per scanner.

You are still putting the individual scanner price into the Cost field and you must do the math to make sure it is the correct price.

Tips!

 Since there is limited space on the reports and screens, we suggest you always put in an abbreviation for the stocking unit.

 If you don't enter a cost when you add items or if you put in the wrong cost, there is no way to edit that transaction and change the price after it has been completed.

 Changing the cost on the Add screen does not change it on the Edit Items screen.

The next time you add Barcode Laser Scanners, for example, the cost will still default to $300. If you want to change the default cost you can change the cost on the Edit Item screen by going to Main Screen > Lists > Item. On the Item List, select the item you wan to change and then click the Edit button. You can then edit the cost. This only changes the cost that is shown automatically the next time you add an item

List Price and Sale Price fields on the Create New Item screen are for information purposes only. These fields are not used on any reports.

What is the Cost for Order Units Per Supplier?

In the Professional and Enterprise versions of InventoryControl you are able to specify multiple Order

Units per Supplier of an item. When you enter an Order Unit that is different from the Stocking Unit, you are telling the system that you are ordering in one unit but when the items are received they will be broken into the different units.

For example, if you order your Barcode Laser Scanners in boxes of 5 but your stocking unit is Each, you need to specify the cost of a box of 5 when you create the Order Unit Settings on the Create New or

Edit Item screen, Manage Suppliers tab, as shown in the image below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

How is Zero Cost Inventory Handled?

If inventory is added or received at $0, that quantity is ignored for average price and valuation purposes.

The only way stock gets added at $0 is if you import inventory or specify a $0 cost at add or receive time.

50 scanners x $300 = $15,000 (from the 1st)

50 scanners x $320 = $16,000 (from the 8th)

1 scanner was found and added to inventory at $0

50 scanners x $315 = $15,750 (from the 15th)

-----------

$46,750 / 150 = $311.67 average cost

InventoryControl Printable Help

The average cost is not $309.60 ($46,750 / 151). Since there is no way to edit the cost of an add or receive after it is processed, InventoryControl ignores the $0 cost adds. If an item is accidentally added at $0 cost the average and valuation would be incorrect until that item is removed through FIFO.

If you do want $0 cost items to be included in the average you can add them at $0.01. Although this would not produce an exact average or valuation, it would have the same effect as averaging in $0 cost items over time.

Inventory that is added using the Adjust screen is added at the average cost for that item at the time of the adjustment. This way the average is not affected since, in most cases, the cost of that item is not known.

Inventory valuation includes the zero cost items when it calculates. The valuation is the number of units times the average price.

$311.67 x 151 scanners = $47,062.17

How is Cost Handled when Receiving against a Purchase Order?

If you have the Pro or Enterprise version, you can create a purchase order (PO) and receive against that

PO. When you do this, the stocking unit's cost is calculated from the cost that is on the PO. Please refer to

Purchase Orders Overview

for more information on using Purchase Orders.

How is Cost Handled When Adding and Receiving on the Mobile Devices?

If you are adding inventory on a mobile device, the cost will transfer as either the Item Cost or the

Average Cost,

depending on the selection made on the Options screen

Keep in mind that there is no way to change the price after the handheld transactions are processed on the PC.

If you have the Enterprise or Pro version and the inventory is received against a PO on the handheld, the item cost is calculated from the cost on the PO. If the final cost is different from what was put on the PO you can edit the handheld transactions as described above.

How is Cost Handled when Importing Inventory?

Inventory does not import with a cost. If you intend to use cost you should manually add your inventory using the Add screen and specify the cost. Usually you can calculate the average cost of your existing inventory and it is recommended that you use the average cost number to start with.

InventoryControl Printable Help

2.8 Using Custom Fields

InventoryControl allows you to create custom fields on your Items, Sites, etc. This enables you to capture information that is specific to your business needs. The Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and

Dates tabs can be found on each of the following screens:

Create New Customer

Create New Manufacturer

Create New Item

Create New Site

Create New Location

Create New Supplier.

Note: The Edit Field Names option on the Options screen must be enabled in order to enter custom text, numbers and dates. For more information on the Options screen, please refer to the

Options

Screen

topic. Below is an example of the Custom Texts tab found on the screens mentioned above:

Note: The fields seen above are not visible when the Edit Field Names option is turned off and no customizations have been applied.

Custom Numbers fields will accept values ranging from -999999999999999.9999 to

999999999999999.9999.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Custom Dates will be displayed in the same format as found elsewhere in the product: "day of the week, month dd, ccyy"

Example:

In this example, with the Edit Field Names option enabled, we have clicked on the Custom Text 1 label

(on the Custom Texts tab of the Create New Customer screen) to edit it. The Form field is grayed-out because this label only occurs on the Customer screen.

Click OK to save the customization or Cancel to abort.

When the Edit Field Names option is subsequently disabled, the Customer Screen > Custom Texts tab appears as shown below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

This field will also be seen in the Edit Customer screen.

2.9 System Administrator Information

Knowledge Base Available to Provide Answers and Solutions

The Wasp Bar Code Knowledge Base is available to help you troubleshoot database issues. To access the Knowledge Base, go to www.waspbarcode.com/support , then select Knowledge Base.

Video Tutorials and Printed Manual

The video tutorials can be found in the How to Videos folder and a PDF version of the printed manual can be found in the Quick Start Guides folder on your installation CD. You can also access the video tutorials from the internet at: www.waspbarcode.com/videos .

Changing the System Administrator Password Can Affect Repair Installs

The System Administrator database password must be blank. If you change the System Administrator database password, you will not be able to replace database files.

Supported Mobile Devices

Data can be sent to the PC from any of the two supported devices: the WDT2200 and Windows Mobile

Devices, including the WDT3200, WDT3200II and WPA206.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 3 - Business Examples

3.1 About Our Business Examples

Throughout the help topics you will see links to business examples. These examples outline three hypothetical companies that represent generic business models and how each would commonly use this product. Find the example company that most closely resembles your business and study the scenario included for it in each section of this document. Remember that even though one the example companies may not exactly match your business, these example are broad enough that at least one should encompass all or part of your business needs.

Each of the three companies uses a different version of InventoryControl. The three versions are:

 Standard - Contains a wide range of options to help you track your inventory including automatic notification of low-stocked items, check in/out capabilities, add/remove feature, tracking and audit as well as full access to mobile devices.

 Professional - All of the features of the Standard version plus it allows for multiple PC's on the network to run InventoryControl. Pick Order, Purchase Order and Receiving capabilities are available along with the ability to assign multiple suppliers to each item.

 Enterprise - The top-of-the-line package, Enterprise incorporates all of the benefits of the

Professional edition and is installed on your company's SQL server.

Note: Even though our example distribution company is using the Enterprise version of InventoryControl, this does not necessarily mean that all distribution companies should use this version. The version of

InventoryControl used should be based on your business needs, rather than your business type.

3.2 Business Example Overviews

Distributing - Enterprise Version of InventoryControl

Basic Needs:

 Multiple Sites and Locations

 Multiple computers running InventoryControl

 Multiple mobile devices in each Location

 Preferred suppliers for items

 Item tracking by serial number and pallet code

 Pick, Receive, Move, Adjust, Add, Remove and Audit at the PC and on the mobile devices

Sebastian Distributing has been in business for many years and has previously used a different inventory software. They have a great deal of inventory in multiple warehouses that they need to manage with

InventoryControl. Each warehouse will be a site with multiple locations. The supervisor of each warehouse will use a computer equipped with InventoryControl, but the general manager will be the one who has full administrative privileges. In addition, they have preferred suppliers they would like to associate with each item in their system and will be creating pick and purchase orders as needed. To accommodate all of these needs, they have purchased the Enterprise version of InventoryControl.

Workers in the warehouses will be issued handheld mobile devices to scan barcode labels when receiving goods from suppliers and picking goods for shipment.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Fleet - Professional Version of InventoryControl

Basic Needs:

 Multiple Sites, Multiple Locations

 One PC running InventoryControl

 One mobile device at each Site

 Inventoried and Non-Inventoried Items

 Track some inventory by serial number

 Pick, Receive, Move, Adjust, Add, Remove and Audit at the PC and on the mobile devices.

Rusty's Cable Service has been using a different inventory software. They consider the vehicles to be sites with one location and a storage facility is another site with multiple locations. Most of their inventory is kept in the vehicles. They are looking for a way to easily set up this site/location relationship and to keep track of inventory as it comes into the storage facility, is transferred to the vehicles, and is sold to a customer.

Their inventory consists of items that will eventually be sold to customers such as cable boxes, remotes, and various types of cable as well as items that will remain in inventory, such as tools and other installation equipment. In addition, they have non-inventory items such as pamphlets and cable guides.

They want the ability to track cable boxes and remotes by serial number. They also want to equip each driver with a mobile deice that can be used to add, remove, move and adjust items as needed.

Mid-sized Reseller - Standard Version of InventoryControl

Basic Needs

 One Site, Multiple Locations

 One PC running InventoryControl

 No mobile devices but a barcode scanner is used at the PC.

 Add, Remove, Adjust, Move and Audit

The example used here is an antique reseller, but this information applies to many different types of businesses, such as second-hand shops, hobby shops, beauty salons, etc., and even small medical/veterinarian businesses who want to track pharmaceuticals and other supplies.

Brady's Bargains is a mid-sized antique reseller with one site and two locations: the storage area and the sales floor. They currently do not have an inventory program and have been keeping up with inventory manually using Excel spreadsheets. They will not be creating purchase orders or pick orders and do not need the ability to assign multiple suppliers to an item, therefore, they have chosen the Standard version of InventoryControl. In addition, Brady's Bargains will not be using mobile devices; they will be inputting information directly into the PC. This shop will be using InventoryControl in conjunction with QuickBooks for their accounting needs and with an unrelated POS system. It is important to note that though

InventoryControl does have scanning capabilities and tracks inventory, it is not a POS system and does not perform inventory billing.

InventoryControl Printable Help

3.3 Setting Up Security Privileges Business Example

Note: For step by step instructions on adding users, please refer to the topic

Adding Users/Editing

Security Data

Business Type: All - This example can apply to all business types and InventoryControl versions.

Step 1 - Prior to adding sites create at least one admin user: Sebastian Distributing has two warehouses into which they receive goods from suppliers. They then ship those goods to carious customers around the country. The manager Pat will be the primary user of the InventoryControl software and will keep track of inventory movements by running reports. Pat will also serve as the system administrator and will take care of maintaining user profiles, creating backups and other administrative tasks. Pat should set herself up with administrative privileges upon accessing the system for the first time. This will set up one administrator besides the default administrator profile. Changes to Pat's user profile do not go into effect until she logs back in again. After setting herself up in the system, Pat should log out of InventoryControl, then log back in using her new user name and password.

Since Pat will have access to all sites, the User can access all current and future sites option should be checked. As Pat adds Sites, she will automatically have permission to all of them.

Below is an example of Pat's Security privileges:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Step 2 - After adding sites and locations continue adding users: When she has completed entering her sites and locations, Pat continues setting up security profiles for her employees who will be using

InventoryControl. She oversees a supervisor at each of her two warehouses, which are her sites. Each supervisor will need to occasionally log on to the PC to perform basic functions such as manually adding, removing or adjusting inventory, performing audits, checking inventory in and out to customers, etc., and also creating pick orders and purchase orders as needed. The supervisors need access to most of the system but do not need full administrative privileges as they will not be creating users, backups or run reports.

Each of these users should have access only to the warehouse were they work. Below is an example of the supervisor's Security screen:

Within the warehouses there are several workers who will be using mobile devices to add and remove inventory and to perform audits. These workers will use InventoryControl exclusively on the mobile device and will not need to log on to the PC.

These workers only need access to specific locations.

On the next page is an example of the warehouse worker's Security screen:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Keep in mind that you should set up each worker with his or her own user name and password. You can use the Copy User feature (Edit > Copy User) to quickly add profiles for users with the same settings.

This allows you to retain the privileges you have selected after entering a new User Name and

Password.

InventoryControl Printable Help

3.4 Setting Up Sites and Locations Business Examples

Note: For step-by-step instructions on adding sites, please refer to the topic

Creating New Sites

. For

step-by-step instructions on adding locations, please refer to the topic

Creating New Locations

Business Type: Distributing - Multiple Sites/Multiple Locations

Sebastian's Distributing has two warehouses. Each warehouse contains various bins, shelves, etc that will physically contain the inventory. Since this business has multiple warehouses, each warehouse can be setup as a Site, then multiple locations can be created within each site to represent the specific areas where inventory will be stored.

They want to set up their site names based on the city where the warehouse is located and their location names based on where the inventory is kept within the site. However, they also want the ability to scan their sites/locations using the handheld barcode scanners, so they know the site/locations should be a short combination of numbers and characters. Since their warehouses are located in Guthrie, Oklahoma and Plano, Texas they want the Site Description to be Guthrie Warehouse and Plano Warehouse. The

Site Codes are set up as numbers: 100G for the Guthrie warehouse and 101P for the Plano warehouse.

They follow a similar pattern with their locations. The Location Description details where and what the location is (Guthrie Wrehouse, Row A, Shelf 01, Bin 00) and the Location Code is a scannable abbreviation of this (GA0100).

Although this business has only two sites, it has many locations; therefore, they create a .csv file of the sites and locations by exporting this information from the old inventory system and importing it into

InventoryControl. For details on importing, refer to the topics

Importing Into the Database

and

Import

Specifics/Database Properties

. After importing, each site and location should be manually reviewed in

InventoryControl to make sure all information is included.

Business Type: Fleet - Multiple Sites/Multiple Locations with From/To Sites Set on the Mobile

Devices

The owner of Rusty's Cable Company has narrowed down his options for setting up his sites and locations to two possibilities. He can define the base garage as the site with each vehicle being a location, along with a storage area setup as a location as well. In this instance the site could be named

Docking1 and the vehicles set up with names consisting of the abbreviation VEH followed by the last four digits of the VIN number for that vehicle. Alternatively, each vehicle could be set up as a site with one location. For example, the site might be VEH plus the last four digits of the VIN, such as VEH1234, with locations being the various bins and shelves within the vehicles. The flexibility of the site/location design allows companies such as Rusty's fleet business to conform the software to fit their needs.

Rusty has decided to set up his storage area as a site with locations of shelves and his vehicles as sites with one location because he knows that he can use the Site Configuration screen to make each mobile device specific to a vehicle. The Site Configuration screen on the mobile devices allows him to designate one site as the From (Remove, Move, Pick) site and one as the To (Add, Mov e, Receive) site.

He can make the From and To sites the same sites, if needed.

Since the usual transfer of inventory for his business flows directly to the vehicles via add/receive, then to the customer via remove, he can set up the From and To sites as the specific vehicles. When his employees then use the device, any lists and searches are limited to the locations contained in that specific vehicle when adding or removing inventory. If employees need to move inventory from the

InventoryControl Printable Help

storage area to a truck, they can quickly change the settings on the Site Configuration screen and make the From site the storage area. Using the Site Configuration screen saves the employee the time it would take to filter through inventory in all sites. For detailed information on the Site Configuration screen on the PC please see the topic

Selecting Sites

. For detailed information on the Site

Configuration screen on the mobile device, please see the topic

WDT2200 - Site Configuration

Windows Mobile Device Site Configuration

In addition, since Rusty wants his employees to be able to scan sites and locations, he makes sure his

Site/Location Codes are short sets of numbers and characters and his Site/Location Descriptions are longer, more detailed descriptions of the code. For example, a Site Code is VEH1234 and the Site

Description is VIN 789001234 - White Ford Econoline.

Business Type: Reseller - One Site/Multiple Locations

Brady's Bargains has multiple locations at one site. The store itself is set up as the site with locations consisting of areas on the sales floor and areas within a storage area. The manager manually inputs the site and locations using the Create New Site and Create New Location screen. Though they will not be using mobile devices, they do have a barcode scanner at the PC that will be used to scan labels on items.

Knowing this, they make sure they set up their Site and Location codes to be scanner friendly. They have set up their Site Code as 100 and the Site Description as Main Store. Their Location Codes follow the pattern of SFA2R12 with Location Descriptions of Sales Floor, Aisle 2, Rack 12.

InventoryControl Printable Help

3.5 Setting Up Suppliers Business Examples

Note: For step by step instructions on creating suppliers, please refer to the topic

Creating New

Suppliers

Business Type: Distributing and Fleet - Multiple Suppliers for Each Item

Sebastian Distributing has established relationships with many different suppliers to obtain their goods.

Which supplier they use for a particular item varies depending on how much they are ordering and what

Site (warehouse) they are ordering for. Due to this, they want to be able to associate more than one supplier with each item and be able to mark a preferred supplier for some items. To do this, they simply import the entire list of suppliers so they are all added to the database at once (refer to the topic Importing into the Database). Later, after they add their items, they can assign as many suppliers as needed to each item and designate one as the preferred supplier. Since all of the suppliers are already in the database, they can quickly select which suppliers to associate rather than having to enter each supplier manually. They can even designate specific shipping unites of measure for each supplier to use for ordering the item.

Business Type: Reseller - One Supplier for Some Items

Brady's Bargains has a list of suppliers from which they regularly receive certain items that they have been maintaining by hand. They will manually input these suppliers on the Create New Suppliers screen before they add the items. They can later manually associate the suppliers to an item using the Edit Item screen/Manage Suppliers tab. Since they are using the Standard version of InventoryControl, they are limited to entering one supplier and one shipping unit of measure for each item.

InventoryControl Printable Help

3.6 Entering Items Business Examples

Note: For step by step instructions on adding items, please refer to the topic

Creating New Items

Business Type: Distributing - Items with Preferred Suppliers

Sebastian Distributing has many items in their existing database so they will be importing their item information. They also want to streamline the purchase order process for their employees. Many items are typically ordered from the same supplier so they manually enter the preferred supplier information on the Manage Suppliers tab on the Edit Item screen for each item after the items are imported. They also set up the preferred shipping unit of measure for each supplier on this tab. By doing this, the preferred supplier information and associated preferred unit of measure will appear on new purchase orders as soon as the item is added to the order.

Another time-saving step they take is to make sure all Item Codes are scannable. They enter the longer, descriptive name in the Item Description field.

Business Type: Fleet - Items with Primary Locations

Items are typically assigned to the same locations in Rusty's Cable Company. The manager of Rusty's

Cable Company has set up their sites as vehicles and each vehicle contains basically the same locations.

There are bins for certain types of cables, a bin for remotes, a rack for cable boxes, etc. The configuration for each vehicle is the same. For each item, they want to designate a primary location within each site (vehicle). By doing this, when a user receives or adds an item using the mobile device or on the PC the primary location will automatically appear on the screen, saving the employee from having to search for it. (The location can be changed to something other than the primary location, if needed).

This is true for picking or removing inventory as well - the item will be removed from the primary location by default unless the user changes the location.

Designating primary locations works for Rusty's Cable Company in conjunction with the Site

Configurations they have selected. The manager has set a primary location for each item in each site and each mobile device's From/To sites are set to a specific vehicle.

To set up primary locations the manager can simply import items, making sure the import file contains a column designating the item as having a preferred location (a Y should be in the Supplier column for that item). Please refer to the Item Import Templates found in your installation folder or on your installation

CD for an example of this.

Business Type: Reseller - Items Imported

Brady's Bargains imports their item list from their existing Excel spreadsheet. They will also be tracking some items so they make sure to import this information correctly. Refer tot he Item Import Templates found in your installation folder or on your installation CD and to the topics,

Importing Into the Database

and

Import Specifics/Database Properties

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 4 - PC Operation Basics

4.1 User Log On

The Log On screen appears when InventoryControl is first started and when you select File > Log Out.

Complete both fields, then click OK to logon to the system.

The User Name field is not case sensitive.

The Password field is case sensitive. Asterisks will be displayed as you type the Password.

The first time you open InventoryControl you can enter the following information:

User Name: Admin

Password: (blank)

InventoryControl Printable Help

After log on, the password can be changed via File > Change Password.

The Admin account, or any other account with Administration Privilege, can use the Security Privileges screen to add Users and set their privileges and reset their passwords. For more information on adding

users, please refer to the

Adding Users/Editing Security Privileges

- Accesses the Options screen where you can customize how certain aspects of the

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.2 About the About Screen

The About Screen allows you to view and manage licenses and provides program version details.

Note: All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition. The screens in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ. For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of

Upgrading on the Main screen.

Using/Viewing the About Screen:

This screen displays your version and basic license information. an example of the Licenses screen:

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.3 Main Screen

The Main screen is divided into four sections:

Section A: Toolbar

Section B: Left-Hand Navigation

Section C: Main Functions

Section D: Context-Sensitive Menu

Below is an example of the Main screen:

Note: The Receive/Pick icon only appears on Pro and Enterprise Versions. The Receive/Pick and

Mobility icons do not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.3.1 Section A: Toolbar

The toolbar provides access to the following functions:

File Menu:



Change Password

- Allows the user currently logged in to change his/her password.



Log Off

- Logs the current user off of the system.

 Exit - Exits the system.

Tools Menu:



Options

software behave.



Select Site

- Accesses the Select Site screen. InventoryControl allows you to work with more

than one Site and multiple Locations within each Site.



Archive Transactions

- Allows you to store older data in an archive.

 Reset All Field Names - This option resets any field names you have customized through the

Edit Field Names function.

 Reset All Grid Settings - This option resets all settings (sorting, grouping, hidden columns) you may have made to your list screens to their default settings.

Check For Alerts:

When selected an

Alerts drop down list

will appear displaying any alerts, such as overdue items.

Help Menu:

 Contents/Index/Search - Accesses this help file.



Update Licenses

- Allows you to update your existing license(s).



Check for Updates

- When this option is selected, the system will search for updates to the

software and alert you if any exist. You can then download the updates at your convenience. the software automatically searches for updates at start up. This option allows you to manually search for updates at other times. Checking for Updates requires internet access.

4.3.2 Section B: Left-Hand Navigation

This software contains a menu on the left side of the Main Screen that provides access to the following features:

 New - Displays a menu of all Create New screens (Customer, Locations, Items, etc.). Select which type of data you want to create from the menu.

 Lists - Displays a menu of all Lists in the system. Select which List you want to view from the menu. For detailed information on using the list screens, please refer to the topic

Working with

Lists

InventoryControl Printable Help



Find

- Displays a menu of data options from which to search (Customer, Locations, etc.) Select

which type of data you want to search. A Find screen appears allowing you to quickly search for information.



Labels

- Displays a menu of labels you can print. Printing Labels utilizes the Labeler software

that come bundled with your program. For detailed instructions on using the Labeler software, please refer to the Labeler help file (accessible through the Labeler software).

4.3.3 Section C: Main Functions

This section displays the primary functions of this software. To access any of these functions:

1. Click on an icon. A menu of options for that function appears at the bottom of the screen (section

D - described below).

2. Click on an icon in the menu to access that function.

Available menu options are:

Administration

- This option provides access to basic administrative functions such as adding users to

the system, maintaining user security profiles, backing up and/or restoring the database, importing/exporting information and maintaining your company information.

Inventory

- This option provides access to the inventory features of the software. From this menu you

can add or remove inventory, move inventory from one location to another, adjust inventory amounts and audit all inventory in your system.

Reports

- This option opens the Reports screen allowing you to select from a wide range of available

reports.

Mobility - This option does not apply to WaspNest Inventory. This option provides access to your mobile device options.

Pick/Receive

- This option does not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

(Pro and Enterprise Versions Only)

- This options provides access to the pick/receive features of the software.

4.3.4 Section D: Context-Sensitive Menus

The bottom of the Main Screen will display a menu based on the selection you make from the Main

Functions icons.

Note: Security does not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

Examples:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Administration Menu

Inventory Menu

Note: Check-In, Check-Out, Assemble and Disassemble do not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

Receive/Pick Menu

Note: Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Mobility Menu

Note: Mobility does not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

This example is of the WDT2200 menu. The icons in this menu will look different if you are using a

Windows Mobile® /CE™ mobile device, but the options will be the same.

Reports Menu

This icon opens the Select Report screen. For more information on the Select Report screen, please refer to the topic

Selecting Reports

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.4 Changing Your Password

This feature allows the user currently logged in to change his or her password.

Note for WaspNest Users: This feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory. For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help >

Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Changing Your Password:

1. From the Main Screen, click File > Change Password. The Change Password screen appears.

2. Enter your old password, your new password, then confirm your new password. As passwords are typed, asterisks will be displayed. Passwords are case sensitive.

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.5 Update License Screen

The Update License screen allows you to enter a regular License Key to upgrade from the Demo version, or an Update License Key to increase the number of Mobile Devices InventoryControl will support. You can also view the install serial number and activation code information.

Updating License(s):

2. If the program has not yet been activated, you will be prompted to enter an Activation Code now.

Click on the registration link that appears above the serial number and then complete the information on the Wasp support page. An email will be sent back to you that contains the

Activation Code. Type this code back into the Activation Code field, then click OK to activate the program.

If the program has been activated, the following screen appears:

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Enter a new Serial Number to add additional features such as additional mobile device licenses. key.

If you use this form to upgrade from the Demo version to a Licensed version of this software, the License

Key you enter here will be displayed on the About screen.

If you use this form to increase the number of Mobile Devices InventoryControl will support, your original

License Key will continue to be displayed in Help > About, but it will display the new number of mobile devices permitted.

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.6 Selecting Sites

InventoryControl allows you to work with more than one Site and multiple Locations within each Site. At any time, you can limit all your transactions to a specified Source, a specified Destination, or allow transactions at All Sites. These are chosen on the Select Site screen.

Note for WaspNest Inventory Users: WaspNest Inventory only allows for one Site. For information on the benefits of upgrading WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Keep in mind that you can only select sites to which you have been given access in

Security

Selecting a Source on the Select Site screen determines the locations available in the Location field of the Add, Remove, Check-In, Check-Out, Adjust and Audit functions. It will also determine the locations available in the From Location field of the Move function. Only locations within the Site selected in the Source field will be available for these functions.

Destination determines the locations available in the Move function's To Location field.

Remember, you are selecting Sites on this screen. When you select a site, you are limiting the inventory functions to locations within that site.

For information on adding new sites, please refer to the

Creating a New Site

topic. For information on adding new locations, please refer to the

Creating New Locations

Disabling the Automatic Version Check Feature

A Note on Importing: The site specified in the Destination field of the Select Site screen can impact the

Locations into which imported inventory will be recorded. When something other than <all> is specified as your Source site, imported inventory will be put into Locations at the specified Source. If you have varying site information you wish to import along with the location and quantity data for each Item

Number, you must make sure the Source is set to <all> before importing data into the Inventory table.

This topic discusses:

How to Select Sites

Source and Destination Examples

4.6.1 How to Select Sites:

InventoryControl Printable Help

By default, all locations are allowed in all functions. This is designated by choosing <all> in both the Source and Destination fields, as shown above. have entered in the system will appear in the drop down lists.

4.6.2 Source and Destination Examples:

Example 1:

If you want to limit the available locations for adding, removing, checking in/out, adjust and auditing inventory to one location (in this example, Warehouse1), you would select that location in the Source field as shown below:

In the above example, inventory can be moved from a location within Warehouse 1 to any other location at another site..

Example 2:

If you want to limit the available locations for adding, removing, checking in/out, adjust and auditing inventory to one location (in this example, Warehouse1), and you want to limit move destinations to one site (in this example, Warehouse2), you would select Warehouse1 in the Source field and Warehouse2 in the Destination field as shown below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Example 3:

If you want to limit the available locations for adding, removing, checking in/out, adjust and auditing inventory to one location (in this example, Warehouse2), and you want to limit move destinations to locations in the same site, you would select Warehouse2 in the Source field and Warehouse2 in the

Destination field as shown below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.7 Logging Out

Logging Out allows the current user to log out of the system so another user can log in, if needed. to log in.

2. Enter a valid User Name and Password and press OK to log on again or click Cancel to exit.

Note: You can also log in as a different user by going to Administration > Security > Log in

as Different User.

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.8 Checking for Software Updates

By default, the software will check for updates to the application and notify you if a more recent version is available when you login to the system. You can then access the Updates website and download the latest version. This ensures you are always working with the most up-to-date version available to you.

This feature is turned on by default.

InventoryControl must be installed on a machine with Internet access to check for updates.

You can turn off the automatic check and perform periodic manual checks, or leave the option on and perform a manual check, if desired.

This topic discusses:

Performing a Manual Check

4.8.1 Disabling the Automatic Version Check Feature:

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can manually check for updates as needed.

4.8.2 Performing a Manual Check:

From the Main Screen, click Help > Check for Updates.

The system will automatically check for a newer version and notify you if one is available. This procedure can be performed at any time.

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.9 Item Stock Level List Screen

The software can automatically notify you of under-stocked items, broken down by location. By enabling the Automatic Notification of Low Order Item on the Options screen, the software will display the Item

Stock Level List when you first start up the system. This screen contains items that have a Quantity value equal to or less than the Reorder Quantity value set for that item and location on the Location tab of the Create New or Edit Item screen. For more information on enabling and disabling this options,

information on Locations, please refer to the

In order for items to appear on this screen, a Reorder Quantity must be entered on the Location tab of the Create New Item screen or, after the item is created, on the Edit Item screen.

Below is an example of the Item Stock Level List:

Click the View Report button at the bottom of the screen to display the Reorder Report.

You can use this report to aid you in creating purchase orders for the under-stocked items.

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.10 Alerts

InventoryControl contains built alerts that you can display to tell you when action needs to be taken on certain items or orders in the system. To access the Alerts feature, select Check for Alerts from the

Main screen.

Note for WaspNest Users: Alerts are not available in WaspNest Inventory. For more information on the benefits of upgrading, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The following is a list of Alerts that might appear on your system:

Kit Item(s) with incomplete info

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Assembly items with incomplete info

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Checked Out Item(s) Past Due

Purchase Orders Past Due

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Pick Orders Past Due

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Expired Items - This alert displays all items with expired date codes.

Items Understocked by Location

Items Understocked by Item Totals

Items with Negative Quantity

Items Understocked by Forecasted Item Totals - This alert appears if InventoryControl determines items need to be re-ordered taking into account the quantity available in house, the quantity on order (via purchase orders), and the quantity scheduled to be removed (via pick orders).

The alert appears if the Total Available plus the quantity on order via Purchase Orders is less than the quantity needed for scheduled Pick Orders (Committed – (Total Available + On Order)).

On the next page is an example of the Alerts menu:

InventoryControl Printable Help

4.11 Adding Notes

Several screens in the software provide the option to add notes to the record. Clicking on the Add Note button allows you to associate any comments you may have with the record you are creating or editing.

This is useful to keep comments associated with the record.

Enter your notes in the text box, then click OK to save and exit.

Notes are displayed along with the date/time it was entered and the user name of the user who added it.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 5 - Creating New Data

5.1 Creating a New Site

Note: You can only have one site in WaspNest Inventory.

The Create New Site screen allows you to add a new Site to your database. Typically, a Site is a building that contains one or more inventory Locations. It is usually a building, but it might also be a fleet vehicle, with one or more bins that can be defined as inventory Locations within that vehicle. For more

Creating New Locations

topic.

It is not uncommon to use this product with only one Site defined. A minimum of one Site is required.

Adding a New Site:

From the Main screen, select Lists > Site. On the Site List, select the New icon.

The Create New Site screen appears: useful when the Site value is vague (For example, Site "H7" could be described as "Hangar 7").

Notes is a text field available to record any additional information you might have about this Site.

Click the Add Notes button to edit the Notes field.

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

Using

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

4. When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

Import Into Database topic.

topic.

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.2 Creating New Customers

The Create New Customer screen allows you to add a new customer to your database. When you are setting up your software for the first time, you may want to import your customers rather than adding them one at a time through this screen. For information on importing information into your database, please refer to the

Adding a Customer:

From the Main screen, select Lists > Customer. On the Customer List, select the New icon.

The Create New Customer screen appears:

Note: This screen is opened automatically when Checking Out or Checking In inventory and a new customer name is entered.

2. Type in the customer information. The Customer No. and Address Type fields are required; all other fields are optional. The customer name and address can then be selected when creating

InventoryControl Printable Help

Pick Orders (Pro and Enterprise versions only).

If you have the Automatic Customer Numbers option selected on the Options screen, the

Customer No. field will appear populated with the next number in the sequence. For further information on the this option, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

The software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address, Receiving Address and/or

Shipping Address for your customers. To enter multiple address, follow the steps below: address you will be entering from the Address Type drop down menu. b. Enter the remainder of the address information, then click OK. You will be returned to the Administration Menu. populated with the information you just entered. d. Select a different address type of the Address Type drop down menu. The address lines

(Address 1 and 2, City, State, Postal Code and Country) will clear while all other company information will remain on the screen. e. Enter the new address information, then click OK. Repeat these steps for each address type.

3. When you have finished entering data in the General Information tab, click the Additional

Information tab (this tab is optional).

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where you can record the customer's

Phone, Extension, Fax, Cell No., Home No. and Email. In addition, you can create notes on this customer on this tab by clicking the Add Notes button.

4. For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

Using

5. When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

For more information about setting the Close New Form option on the Options screen, please refer to the

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.3 Creating New Inventory and Non-Inventory Items

The Create New Item screen allows you to add a new Item to your database and to specify how you want to track each item (by Serial Number, Lot, Date Code and/or Pallet).

What is an Item? - Items represent the actual material or good that you will have in your inventory. For example, you might create an Item entry for Mouse - Wireless. Then you can add inventory, or quantity, to that item. If you are using the Enterprise or Professional version of this software, you can also create items that are non-inventory. This is useful if you need to create an item for marketing pamphlets, counter displays or anything you need to have, but for which you don't need to track quantity.

What is a Non-Inventory Item? - A non-inventory item is anything you order or receive, but do not want to track the location and quantity of. An example of a non-inventory item might be marketing materials like a product flyer that is taken to trade shows or put in product boxes. Once you are out you may never buy more of that item and you don't need to know how many are left. You may need to include noninventory items on a purchase order and verify receipt to have a payment paper trail but you do not need to keep track of the item after it is received. InventoryControl allows you to add non-inventory items onto purchase orders in the Pro and Enterprise versions.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Main

screen.

When you are setting up your software for the first time, you may want to import your items rather than adding them one at a time through this screen. For information on importing information into your

database, please refer to the

Accessing the Create New Item Screen

topic.

This topic discusses:

General Information Tab

Location Settings Tab

Additional Information Tab

Manage Suppliers Tab

Custom Texts/Custom Numbers and Dates Tab

Saving the New Item

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.3.1 Accessing the Create New Item Screen:

From the Main screen, select Lists > Item. On the Item List, select the New icon.

Note: For information on creating Assembly Items, please see the topic

Creating an Assembly

Item

(Pro and Enterprise versions only).

For information on creating Kit Items, please see the topic

Creating a Kit Item

(Pro and

Enterprise versions only).

The Create New Item screen appears:

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.3.2 General Information Tab:

The General Information tab is where you will enter the basic information about the item. Please see the screen shot above for an example of this tab.

To create the item, enter information in the provided fields. Much of this information is optional. You can be as detailed as you need, but at a minimum you must enter the Item Number. Below are descriptions of each field on this tab.

Field Description

The Item Number is often available on a barcode label already attached to the item, such as a UPC code or SKU number. Using an existing barcode for the

Item Number allows you to scan or manually enter the number from each item as it comes in without having to print and affix your own barcode inventory item labels. Item numbers in InventoryControl cannot exceed 31 characters.

Item Number

Do not use a description as the item number. You should enter a numeric value

(Required)

in the Item Number field. A description of the item can be entered in the

Description field.

Automatic Item Numbers: If you have the Automatic Item Numbers option selected on the Options screen, the Item Number field will appear populated with the next number in the sequence. For example, if you just created item number 1001, the next number will be 1002. For further information on this

tracking fields, please refer to the topic

topic.

Category

A Category is an optional classification you can give to your items. This provides you with another way to group your items. For example, you could create a

Category called laptops and assign that category to any laptop items you have.

You might have multiple items representing different makes and models of laptops. If you assign the category "Laptops" to all of those items, you can then group your list by Category and quickly see all laptop items.

You can create new Categories by typing in the desired name in the Category field. You will receive a message asking if you want to save the new Category.

Select Yes to save. Categories you have already created will appear in a drop down list.

Checkout

Length

This field specifies the default period, in days, that this Item can be checked out to a customer.

This is the entity that manufactured the item. This field is optional and provides

Manufacturer

another way to sort and group your items. When a new Manufacturer is typed into the Manufacturer field, you will receive a message asking if you want to save the value as a new Manufacturer.

Enterprise

Versions

Select Non-inventory if you do not want this item to be inventoried, or select

Type (Pro and

Inventory to inventory this item. This field will not appear on the Standard version.

Only)

Non-Inventoried items are those items, such as marketing pamphlets, that you have on hand, but do not want to track.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Item to be

Tracked By

The Item To Be Tracked By section contains check boxes which determine whether the Serial Number, Lot, Date Code and/or Pallet of an item will be used to track its movement through your inventory. For a more detailed explanation of

Identifying Tracking Needs

When you are creating your item it is important that you determine how you want to track each item. Typically, small items that are all the same may not need to have any Track Bys selected. Items such as printers may need to be tracked by

Serial Number, so returns and maintenance can be properly tracked. Medical supplies or food may need to be tracked by Date Code and/or Lot.

If you choose to track by one or more of these fields, you will be prompted to complete them each time you perform a transaction, such as check out, move, remove, add, etc., on this item. For example, if you are tracking item 2233 -VZ

Laptop by serial number. Now you want to move a quantity of 5 of this item from on location to another. You will be prompted to enter a unique and valid serial number for each laptop you are moving so that your inventory can be accurately tracked.

Tracked By options cannot be changed after you add inventory to the item.

If you need to change a tracked by item, you will have to remove all inventory from that item, delete the item and create a new record.

Track by

Serial

Number

Lot

Date

Code

Pallet

How is it

used?

Serial Numbers must be unique for each item and limit you to managing one item at a time.

These numbers are provided by the manufacturer to indicate from which batch these items were made.

Date Code track the expiration or other "use by" date.

Pallet refers to the pallet from which the item was received.

Example

Equipment such as printers and radios or anything for which you need to know which specific item you are using.

 Medical

Supplies

 Pharmaceuticals

 Food

 Chemicals

 Manufacturing

Supplies

 Building

Supplies

InventoryControl Printable Help

Automatic

Serial

Numbers

(Does not apply to

WaspNest)

You can choose to have the program automatically create and assign serial numbers each time you add inventory for this item (whether manually using the

Add Inventory feature or by Receiving Inventory). For example, you create the item "2233 - VZ Laptop" and select to track by serial number. You the enable automatic serial numbers by performing the steps described here. You choose

1000 as your starting number. Now, when you add inventory to this item,

InventoryControl will automatically assign serial number to each item starting with

1000. If you add inventory of 500 to this item, the serial numbers assign by

InventoryControl will be 1000 - 1500.

To enable Automatic Serial Numbers:

 Click the button to the right of the Serial Number check box. The Auto

Serial Number Options screen is displayed:

 Check software automatically assign incremented serial numbers.

 Enter the serial number sequence starts. Since this option is applied at the

Item level, each Item in the program may have its own unique series of serial numbers.

OK to accept your entries.

This section contains check boxes which act much like the Tracked By boxes, but contains a different set of fields (PO, Supplier and Customer) which are always

Require the

User to Fill

Out (Does not

available for use, even if they are not required. For example, if the option is not enabled for the Supplier Code field, a user adding inventory can enter a value for

Supplier Code if he knows it or skip entering a value if he doesn't. If this option is

apply to

enabled, a value for Supplier Code is required to complete the transaction.

WaspNest)

Cost

Cost specifies the amount your company paid to get this item into inventory. This is an optional tool to help you track your average cost. Cost handling in

InventoryControl is designed to show you the average cost and current value of your inventory. You can use this cost information for other purposes as well, such as determining pre-tax and purchase order totals and receiving totals.

This amount represents your cost for purchasing one of the stocking units for this item. If one Barcode Laser Scanner costs $300.00 you will enter 300 into the cost field. If you have items in your inventory that are sold in fractional quantities,

InventoryControl Printable Help

you will need to decide which stocking unit to use. For example, if you have

Rope as an item and it costs you $0.12 a foot, you would enter 12 in the Cost field and Feet as the Stocking Unit (entered on the Additional tab). If you rarely sell the rope in exact multiples of feet, you may want to enter your Stocking Unit as Inches, since this is the lowest unit measured, and enter your cost per inch in the Cost field. It is up to you how you want to calculate this; however, you should make sure that the Cost you enter is the cost for one whole Stocking Unit (either

Feet or Inches, in our example).

Keep in mind that you can enter a new cost on the Add Inventory screen if you purchase this item at a discount.

For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing,

please see the topic Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing.

Select how you want InventoryControl to calculate cost for this item. Options are:

Legacy Method - This is the method used in previous versions of

InventoryControl. The legacy method uses FIFO and manages cost by location and track by level.

Note: If you upgrade your version of InventoryControl to version 6 (which contains additional methods), all existing items will be imported with the legacy method. You can change to a new option on the Edit Item screen.

Cost Method

Moving Average - When this method is used, the average cost of a particular item is recalculated based on each purchase. Cost is calculated on the item level.

FIFO - When this method is used, the inventory that is added first is removed first. Cost is calculated on the item level.

LIFO - When this method is used, the inventory that is added last (most recently) is removed first. Cost is calculated on the item level.

For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing, please see the topic Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing.

This is a calculated value that averages the cost paid for the current Quantity.

This will be blank when you are entering a new item, but will appear when you are viewing the Edit Item screen for an item that has inventory (quantity).

If you have 20 quantity of this item at cost 10.00 and add another 30 quantity at cost 8.00,

Average Cost = ((20 x 10.00) + (30 x 8.00)) / 50 = 8.80

Average Cost

Removes are calculated using the inventory calculation method you specified.

For example, if you are using the FIFO method, if you later remove 5, 5 of the

$10.00 items will be removed first,

Average Cost = ((15 x 10.00) + (30 x 8.00)) / 45 = 8.67

When calculating Average Cost, the software does not include records that have an average cost of zero. When you run an Inventory Cost Report, the software

InventoryControl Printable Help

List Price

does include zero cost quantities when calculating Total Cost.

This field specifies a manufacturer's list price for an item. This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports.

Sale Price

This field specifies the price at which you sell an item. This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports.

Min Stock

Level

Max Stock

Level

This field specifies the minimum stock level you wish to maintain for this item.

This field specifies the maximum stock level you wish to maintain.

Reorder Qty This field specifies the quantity at which you want to reorder inventory.

throughout all locations. This means if you have 4 locations, these are the quantities you want to have spread out among those locations. If you want to maintain these levels by location, you can do so on the

Location Settings tab (described below).

The fields below only appear on the Edit Item screen.

Total Available counter is the sum of Total Checked-Out and Total In-House.

 The

Total On Order counter is the quantity of this item that is currently included on an active Pick Order.

Total Buildable (applies to Assembly Items only) is the quantity that can be built of this Assembly Item based on the inventory levels of the component items.

Committed counter (applies to Assembly, Inventory and Non-Inventory items only) is the number that has been committed to a pick order.

Total Shippable (applies to Kit Items only) is the total on hand amount minus committed quantities for all component items. (Committed is inventory that is contained on a pick order.)

5.3.3 Location Settings Tab:

When you have completed the General Information tab, click the Location Settings tab. This tab allows you to enter all locations where this item will be in inventory and to designate a primary location. You can assign items to more than one location. This tab uses the List functionality for grouping, ordering, filtering and deleting.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Complete the fields on this screen as described below:

 Primary Location - Select this checkbox if this will be the primary location at this site for this item. A primary location can be selected for each Site you have setup in the system. When you select a primary location, when you Receive quantities of that item from a purchase order, they will automatically be assigned to that location. Also, when you Pick quantities of that item for pick orders, they will automatically be removed from that location. You can change these locations when picking and receiving if necessary. In addition, the primary location will appear in any location fields (on the Add inventory screen, for example), however; you can change the location, if needed.

Only one primary location can be selected per site.

 Site and Location - Click in the box and select a Site and Location from the drop down list.

Only sites and locations you have previously selected will appear in this list. Select More to view the Site or Location List. You can also select New Location or New Site to access the

Create New screen. These represent the site and the location where the inventory will reside.

 Quantity - This number is populated from the Inventory for this item. This number displays how many of this item is currently in stock at the selected site and location. If you are creating a new item this field will be blank (0).

 Max Stock Level - Enter the maximum number of this item that you want to have in stock for the selected site and location. This number can be 0 or a positive number, negative numbers are not allowed.

 Min Stock Level - Enter the minimum number of this item that you want to have in stock for the selected site and location. This number can be 0 or a positive number, negative numbers are not allowed.

 Reorder Qnty - Enter the number at which you want to reorder this item for the selected Site and Location. You can set an option in the software so that the system warns you at login of

InventoryControl Printable Help

any inventory items that have hit their reorder quantity. For further information on setting this option, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

After you have completed all fields, hit ENTER to begin a new line. Your screen will look similar to the following after hitting ENTER:

5.3.4 Additional Information Tab:

When you have finished entering information on the Location Settings tab, click the Additional tab. The

Additional Information tab provides optional fields where other information about the Item can be recorded. An example of this tab is shown below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Complete the fields on this tab as described below:

 Stocking Unit is the portion by which the quantity will be tracked. At the item level, this should be "Eaches", meaning you should enter how you want each item of this type to be measured.

(Examples: bag, barrel, basket, block, bottle, box, carton, container, drum, gallon, jar, pack, package, pallet, section, tub, vial, etc.)

When entering the stocking unit, you need to pick the smallest unit of measure that you will use to remove a whole item. A good test to use when deciding what the stocking unit should be is to think about what your answer would be if you were asked to count how many of this item you have. If the answer is 100 feet of rope "feet or "ft" is the stocking unit. If the answer is 20 scanners, then "each or "ea." is the stocking unit. Each is common when the unit itself is not a standard unit of measure. If the answer is 100 boxes of nails then "box" or "bx" is the stocking unit.

You will have the opportunity on the Managing Suppliers tab to enter the Order Unit used by the supplier for shipping purposes (Box, Pallet, Lot, etc.). This is useful if you purchase in larger quantities than you stock. The Order Unit will be used when creating Purchase Orders rather than the "Eaches" UOM that is entered on this tab. Please see the Managing Suppliers Tab section, below.

 Dimension Unit is the increment to be used for Length, Width and Height. (Examples: inch, foot, yard, millimeter, centimeter, meter, etc.)

 Length is the length of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Width is the width of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Height is the height of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Weight Unit is the increment to be used for mass. (Examples: ounce, pound, ton, milligram, gram, kilogram, metric ton, etc.)

 Weight is the mass of one Unit of Measure expressed in Weight Units.

 Manager is used to record the name of someone who manages this inventory item.

 File Reference is used to record the path to a relevant file that might be an image file, documentation, specifications, etc. This field does not function as a hyperlink. It's just a static field where a filename or path and filename can be recorded.

 Add Notes allows you to record any additional information.

5.3.5 Manage Suppliers Tab:

This tab allows you to identify which suppliers you will use for this item and enter detailed supplier information, such as unit of measure. Pro and Enterprise users can enter multiple suppliers for an item and mark one as the default, or preferred supplier. Standard version users can enter only one supplier for each item. WaspNest Inventory users can enter only one supplier for each item.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Adding Suppliers to an Item:

To use this tab you must first select suppliers for this item in the Supplier screen. To do this: screen are enabled. the list to create a new supplier. c. Enter the SKU number for this item in the Supplier Item SKU field. d. Enter the description of this item given by the supplier in the Supplier Item Description field. e. Enter the number of days lead time the supplier needs to process orders for this item in the Lead Time (in days) field. The lead time is the time from the requisition date to the delivery date. For example, if you need the item by the 15th of the month and the supplier requires 5 days to deliver the order, you would enter 5 here to ensure the order is sent to the supplier timely. change the status by making a new selection from the drop down menu. g. You can make this the default supplier for this item by checking the Make this the

default Supplier while ordering this item checkbox (Pro and Enterprise versions

only). When this is selected, this supplier will automatically populate purchase orders for this item. You can change the supplier on the purchase order, if needed. h. Any notes entered for this supplier will appear in the Notes section. i. You can enter the supplier's unit of measure settings in the Order Unit Settings screen

(Pro and Enterprise versions only). This is the unit used by the supplier when shipping this item. This may be box, pallet, etc. This is different from the "Eaches" stocking unit you entered on the Additional tab. For example, you may have entered "jar" for the stocking unit on the Additional tab, but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars. When creating purchase orders, you would want to specify the Order

Unit as box rather then jar (or you could end up with 100 boxes of jars rather than 100 jars).

You can also enter the number of the item contained in each of the Order Units and the

Cost of the Order Unit.

If you are tracking cost and have entered information in the Cost field (General Tab) and in the Stocking Unit field (Additional Tab), when you receive the item, InventoryControl will do the math and will calculate the cost per item received.

For example, if you order item Barcode Laser Scanners in boxes of 20 at $3500, but your stocking unit is each, you need to specify the cost of a box of 20 when you are setting up your Supplier information here. When the item is received, InventoryControl will calculate the cost per item received. $3500/20 = $175.00.

You can enter multiple order units, if needed. When you are creating your purchase

InventoryControl Printable Help

orders you can then select which one you want to use. j. When you are done entering supplier information, click the Custom Texts or Custom

Numbers and Dates tab (these tabs are optional).

Deleting Suppliers from an Item:

a. Highlight the supplier you want to delete from this item in the Supplier screen.

5.3.6 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab:

For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

Using Custom

Fields

5.3.7 Saving the New Item:

When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

database, please refer to the

topic.

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.6 Automatic Serial Numbers

You can choose to have the program automatically create and assign serial numbers each time you add inventory for this item (whether manually using the Add Inventory feature or by Receiving Inventory). This option is available when creating a new item on the Create New Item screen. For complete details on creating a new item, please refer to the

Creating New Item topic.

1. Click the checkbox to make the item you are adding or editing auto increment the serial number for each item added into inventory.

2. If you are using alphabetic or alphanumeric values as Serial Numbers, the Automatic Serial

Number option will still generate a numeric Serial Number, beginning with the value of entered in the Starting Number Field, if it does not exist already.

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.7 Creating New Locations

The Create New Location screen allows you to add a new Location to an existing Site or a new Location to a new Site. Locations are places within a Site where inventory resides. The site is usually a building, but it might also be a fleet vehicle, with one more bins that can be defined as inventory Locations within that vehicle. For example, a site might be setup as Building 1 with a location of Supply Closet.

A location is typically shorthand for a physical place such as a shelf in your warehouse. Commonly used conventions include Location codes like this:

01 02 05 (for Row #, Shelf #, Bin #)

When you are setting up your software for the first time, you may want to import your locations rather than adding them one at a time through this screen. For information on importing information into your

3. For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

topic.

Adding Locations:

From the Main Screen, click Lists > Location. Then click the New icon on the Location List.

The Create New Location screen will appear.

2. Select a site from the Site drop down menu, then enter the name of your new Location. The

Site and Location fields are both required.

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can type in the name of a new site in the Site field. A message will appear asking if you want to add it to your database. Select Yes to add it. The Create New Site screen will appear allowing you to setup the new site. Complete this screen, the click OK to return to the Create

New Location screen. For detailed information on entering a new site, please refer to the

Creating a New Site

topic.

Description allows you to enter a description of the Location. This is useful when the Location value is vague (For example, Location "A7B2" could be described as "Aisle 7 Bin 2").

Click the Add Notes button to add additional information to this record.

Using

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

4. When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

topic.

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.8 Creating New Manufacturers

The Create New Manufacturer screen allows you to add a new Manufacturer to your database. A

Manufacturer is typically the company or organization that creates an item you will inventory. If a

Manufacturer is also your Supplier for an Item, it is best to setup the company in the software as both a

Manufacturer and a Supplier.

When you are setting up your software for the first time, you may want to import your manufacturers rather than adding them one at a time through this screen. For information on importing information into your database, please refer to the

4. For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

Adding a New Manufacturer:

From the Main Screen, click Lists > Manufacturer. Then click the New icon on the

Manufacturer List.

The Create New Manufacturer screen will appear.

Note: This screen is opened automatically from the Create New Item screen when a new

InventoryControl Printable Help

manufacturer name is entered.

2. Enter information on this screen as needed. The Name and Address Type fields are required, all other fields are optional.

The software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address, Receiving Address and/or

Shipping Address for your manufacturers. To enter multiple address, follow the steps below: address you will be entering from the Address Type drop down menu. b. Enter the remainder of the address information, then click OK. You will be returned to the Administration Menu. populated with the information you just entered. d. Select a different address type of the Address Type drop down menu. The address lines

3. When you have finished entering data in the General Information tab, click the Additional tab

(this tab is optional).

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Additional tab provides optional fields where you can record the manufacturer's Phone,

Extension, Fax, Cell No., Home No. and Email. In addition, you can create notes on this manufacturer on this tab by clicking the Add Notes button.

Using

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

5. When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

database, please refer to the

topic.

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.8 Creating New Suppliers

The Create New Supplier screen allows you to add a new supplier to your database. A supplier is typically the company or organization from which you obtain an Item you will inventory. If a manufacturer is also your supplier for an Item, it is best to add the company in the software as both a Manufacturer and a Supplier.

When you are setting up your software for the first time, you may want to import your suppliers rather than adding them one at a time through this screen. For information on importing information into your

For examples of how specific business types setup their suppliers, please refer to the topic

topic.

Setting up

Suppliers Business Examples

Adding New Suppliers:

From the Main Screen, click Lists > Suppliers. Then click the New icon on the Supplier List.

The Create New Supplier screen appears.

InventoryControl Printable Help

2. Enter information on this screen as needed. The Supplier Code and Address Type fields are required, all other fields are optional. Supplier Codes cannot exceed 25 digits. Make sure the

Supplier Code is a number and the Supplier Description is the detailed description of the supplier.

The software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address, Receiving Address and/or

Shipping Address for your suppliers. To enter multiple address, follow the steps below: type is Supplier Billing. You can choose this option, or type in a new address type. b. If you have entered a new address type, the following screen appears:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Click Yes to add this address type to your database. c. Enter the remainder of the address information. You can then enter another address type, or continue completing the rest of the supplier information. Repeat these steps for each address type.

3. When you have finished entering data in the General Information tab, click the Additional

Information tab (this tab is optional).

The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where you can record the

InventoryControl Printable Help

manufacturer's Phone, Extension, Fax, Cell No., Home No. and Email. In addition, you can create notes on this manufacturer on this tab by clicking the Add Notes button.

4. For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

Using

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

5. When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

topic.

If a supplier with the same Supplier Code is found, the message below will appear when you try to save.

Enter a different Supplier Code to continue.

InventoryControl Printable Help

5.11 Creating a Kit Item

Chapter 6 - Editing Data

6.1 Editing Items

The Edit Items screen allows you to modify an existing item. This screen is accessed from the Item List by highlighting an item in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

topic.

The Edit Items screen is identical to the New Item screen, except all the information previously entered for the item appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Create New Item

the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

6.2. Editing Assembly Items

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Edit Assembly Items screen allows you to modify an existing assembly item. This screen is accessed from the Item List by highlighting an assembly item in the list, then clicking the Edit button on

information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

The Edit Assembly Items screen is identical to the New Assembly Item screen, except all the information previously entered for the item appears on the screen. You can change any of this

Create an Assembly

Item

When editing assembly items, there are two points to keep in mind:

1. You will need to sync the mobile device in order for the changes to be transferred.

2. The change of configuration will not impact mobile transactions already done on the device.

Example: You create an assembly item with two component parts, Item 1 and Item 2. Later, you edit the assembly item to have three component parts, Item 1, Item 2 and Item 3.

InventoryControl Printable Help

6.3 Editing Kit Items

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Edit Kit Items screen allows you to modify an existing kit item. This screen is accessed from the

Item List by highlighting a kititem in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

topic.

The Edit Kit Items screen is identical to the New Kit Item screen, except all the information previously entered for the item appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Creating a Kit Item

topic.

When editing Kit items, there are two points to keep in mind:

1. You will need to sync the mobile device in order for the changes to be transferred.

2. The change of configuration will not impact mobile transactions already done on the device.

6.4 Editing Sites

The Edit Site screen allows you to modify an existing site. This screen is accessed from the Site List by highlighting a site in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

tab of the screen, please refer to the

topic.

The Edit Site screen is identical to the New Site screen, except all the information previously entered for the site appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each

Create New Site

6.5 Editing Locations (or a Site and Location)

The Edit Location screen allows you to modify an existing location. This screen is accessed from the

Location List by highlighting an location in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

topic.

The Edit Location screen is identical to the New Location screen, except all the information previously entered for the location appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Create New Location

topic.

InventoryControl Printable Help

6.6 Edit Customer

The Edit Customer screen allows you to modify an existing customer. This screen is accessed from the

Customer List by highlighting a customer in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

The Edit Customer screen is identical to the New Customer screen, except all the information previously entered for the customer appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Create New Customers

topic.

6.7 Editing Suppliers

The Edit Supplier screen allows you to modify an existing supplier. This screen is accessed from the

Supplier List by highlighting a supplier in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

topic.

The Edit Supplier screen is identical to the New Supplier screen, except all the information previously entered for the supplier appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Create New Supplier

toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

6.8 Editing Manufacturers

The Edit Manufacturer screen allows you to modify an existing manufacturer. This screen is accessed from the Manufacturer List by highlighting a manufacturer in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the

For more information on using the List screens, see the

The Edit Manufacturer screen is identical to the New Manufacturer screen, except all the information previously entered for the manufacturer appears on the screen. You can change any of this information.

For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Create New Customers

topic.

6.9 Editing Pick Orders

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Edit Pick Order screen allows you to modify an existing purchase order. This screen is accessed from the Pick Order List by highlighting an item in the list, then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar.

on the toolbar. For more information on using the List screens, see the

topic.

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Edit Pick Order screen is identical to the New Pick Order screen, except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Creating a Pick Order

topic.

6.10 Editing Purchase Orders

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Edit Purchase Order screen allows you to modify an existing purchase order. This screen is accessed from the Purchase Order List by highlighting an item in the list, then clicking the Edit button

information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

The Edit Purchase Order screen is identical to the New Purchase Order screen, except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen. You can change any of this

Creating a Purchase

Order

Accessing the New Assembly Items Screen

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 7 - Assembly Items

7.1 Assembly Overview

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Assembly items are created when you combine two or more existing items or multiple quantity of one item to create a new item. You will use the Assembly item type when you want to "build" several of the new items to have on hand in your inventory. You can create Assembly Items using Inventoried,

Non-

Inventoried (Items that are not tracked in inventory, but that you want to have a record of. For instance, you can create an item for marketing pamphlets or instruction booklets.)

items and other Assembly items.

Kit Items vs Assembly Items:

While these two item types are used to accomplish similar goals - the grouping of items - they are used for different reasons. Assembly Items are a collection of items that, once grouped, are considered to be a new, single item. The inventory quantities for the individual component items are reduced at the time the Assembly Items are built and the quantity for the Assembly Item is increased. You can build several Assembly Items and keep them on hand in your inventory. In addition, you can move and check in/out Assembly Items.

Kit Items are a collection of items that are sold together, but are listed separately in the transaction

(similar to a bill of goods) and continue to be tracked as separate items. A Kit Item is created at the time of sale. You cannot Add inventory in order to have multiple Kit Items on hand. Inventory amounts for the component parts are reduced when the Kit Item is Removed from inventory.

Assembly Item Example:

Sebastian sells modular cabinets. Each cabinet is made of several different sizes of wood panels and hardware. Sebastian tracks each piece used to build these cabinets as a separate piece of inventory in his system, so he will know when he needs to reorder a particular size of panel or piece of hardware. He builds several of each type of cabinet to have on hand to sell as well. When he does this, he creates an

Assembly Item in InventoryControl that is made up of each piece of inventory used to build the cabinet.

InventoryControl will then deduct the on hand amount for each piece of inventory used in the assembly, and increase the amount on hand of the assembled item.

The flow of Assembly Items is provided below:

1. Create Your Assembly Item: Use the Create New Item screen to create your Assembly Item.

When Assembly is selected as the Item Type, there is a tab labeled Assembly on the Create

New Item screen. Use this tab to indicate what items you want to include in the built Assembly

Item. Keep in mind that after you create your Assembly Item, the quantity for that item is zero and the on hand amounts for the included items have not changed. As with other Items, creating the Assembly Item simply tells InventoryControl basic information about the Assembly Item and indicates what other items you want included with it.

2. Build your Assembly Item: This is a similar process as Adding Inventory to other item types.

In this process you will tell InventoryControl how many of this Assembly Item you want to build.

InventoryControl Printable Help

InventoryControl will check the on hand amounts for each item included in the build to make sure you have enough to complete the desired amount. After the build is complete, the on hand amounts for each item included in your Assembly Item will be reduced by the number built, and the on hand amount for the Assembly Item will be increased.

7.2 Creating an Assembly Item

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen. Assembly Items are used when you want to combine two or more existing items into one new item.

We recommend you read the

Assembly Overview

topic before you begin creating Assembly Items.

This topic discusses:

General Information Tab

Location Settings Tab

Assembly Tab

Additional Information Tab

Manage Suppliers Tab

Custom Texts/Custom Numbers and Dates Tab

Saving the New Item

7.2.1 Accessing the New Assembly Item Screen:

The Create New Item screen appears:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note that in addition to the usual tabs that appear on the Create New Item screen, there is also a tab labeled Assembly Information.

InventoryControl Printable Help

7.2.2 General Information Tab:

The General Information tab is where you will enter the basic information about the item. Please see the screen shot above for an example of this tab.

Enter the appropriate information in the fields provided:

Field Description

The Item Number is often available on a barcode label already attached to the item, such as a UPC code or SKU number. Using an existing barcode for the

Item Number

Do not use a description as the item number. You should enter a numeric value in the Item Number field. A description of the item can be entered in the

(Required)

Description field.

tracking fields, please refer to the topic

topic.

Category

A Category is an optional classification you can give to your items. This provides you with another way to group your items. For example, you could create a

Category called laptops and assign that category to any laptop items you have.

You can create new Categories by typing in the desired name in the Category field. You will receive a message asking if you want to save the new Category.

Select Yes to save. Categories you have already created will appear in a drop down list.

Checkout

Length

This field specifies the default period, in days, that this Item can be checked out to a customer.

This is the entity that manufactured the item. This field is optional and provides

Manufacturer

another way to sort and group your items. When a new Manufacturer is typed into the Manufacturer field, you will receive a message asking if you want to save the value as a new Manufacturer.

Type (Pro and

When you access the Create New Item screen by selecting New > Item >

Enterprise

Assembly, this field will automatically be set to Assembly. If you accessed it

Versions

any other way, you can select Assembly from the Type drop down.

Only)

Item to be

Tracked By

Identifying Tracking Needs

When you are creating your item it is important that you determine how you want

InventoryControl Printable Help

to track each item. Typically, small items that are all the same may not need to have any Track Bys selected. Items such as printers may need to be tracked by

Serial Number, so returns and maintenance can be properly tracked. Medical supplies or food may need to be tracked by Date Code and/or Lot.

Tracked By options cannot be changed after you add inventory to the item.

If you need to change a tracked by item, you will have to remove all inventory from that item, delete the item and create a new record.

Track by

Serial

Number

Lot

Date

Code

Pallet

How is it

used?

Serial Numbers must be unique for each item and limit you to managing one item at a time.

These numbers are provided by the manufacturer to indicate from which batch these items were made.

Date Code track the expiration or other "use by" date.

Pallet refers to the pallet from which the item was received.

Example

Equipment such as printers and radios or anything for which you need to know which specific item you are using.

 Medical

Supplies

 Pharmaceuticals

 Food

 Chemicals

 Manufacturing

Supplies

 Building

Supplies

Automatic

Serial

Numbers

(Does not apply to

WaspNest)

You can choose to have the program automatically create and assign serial numbers each time you add inventory for this item (whether manually using the

1000 as your starting number. Now, when you add inventory to this item,

InventoryControl will automatically assign serial number to each item starting with

1000. If you add inventory of 500 to this item, the serial numbers assign by

InventoryControl Printable Help

InventoryControl will be 1000 - 1500.

To enable Automatic Serial Numbers: a. Click the button to the right of the Serial Number check box.

The Auto Serial Number Options screen is displayed: the software automatically assign incremented serial numbers. at which the serial number sequence starts. Since this option is applied at the Item level, each Item in the program may have its own unique series of serial numbers.

Require the

User to Fill

Out (Does not

available for use, even if they are not required. For example, if the option is not

apply to

contains a different set of fields (PO, Supplier and Customer) which are always enabled for the Supplier Code field, a user adding inventory can enter a value for

Supplier Code if he knows it or skip entering a value if he doesn't. If this option is

WaspNest)

This section contains check boxes which act much like the Tracked By boxes, but enabled, a value for Supplier Code is required to complete the transaction.

Cost

Cost specifies the amount your company paid to get this item into inventory. This is an optional tool to help you track your average cost. Cost handling in

Feet or Inches, in our example).

Keep in mind that you can enter a new cost on the Add Inventory screen if you purchase this item at a discount.

InventoryControl Printable Help

For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing,

please click here

Select how you want InventoryControl to calculate cost for this item. Options are:

Legacy Method - This is the method used in previous versions of

InventoryControl. The legacy method uses FIFO and manages cost by location and track by level.

Cost Method

Moving Average - When this method is used, the average cost of a particular item is recalculated based on each purchase. Cost is calculated on the item level.

FIFO - When this method is used, the inventory that is added first is removed first. Cost is calculated on the item level.

LIFO - When this method is used, the inventory that is added last (most recently) is removed first. Cost is calculated on the item level.

For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing,

please click here

This is a calculated value that averages the cost paid for the current Quantity.

This will be blank when you are entering a new item, but will appear when you are viewing the Edit Item screen for an item that has inventory (quantity).

If you have 20 quantity of this item at cost 10.00 and add another 30 quantity at cost 8.00,

Average Cost = ((20 x 10.00) + (30 x 8.00)) / 50 = 8.80

Average Cost

Removes are calculated using the inventory calculation method you specified.

For example, if you are using the FIFO method, if you later remove 5, 5 of the

$10.00 items will be removed first,

Average Cost = ((15 x 10.00) + (30 x 8.00)) / 45 = 8.67

List Price

Sale Price

When calculating Average Cost, the software does not include records that have an average cost of zero. When you run an Inventory Cost Report, the software

does include zero cost quantities when calculating Total Cost.

This field specifies a manufacturer's list price for an item. This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports.

This field specifies the price at which you sell an item. This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports.

Min Stock

Level

This field specifies the minimum stock level you wish to maintain for this item.

Max Stock This field specifies the maximum stock level you wish to maintain.

InventoryControl Printable Help

Level

Reorder Qty This field specifies the quantity at which you want to reorder inventory.

Note: The Minimum Stock Level, Maximum Stock Level and Reorder Quantity fields found on this tab represent these levels at the item level only, meaning these are the stock levels for this item throughout all locations. If you want to maintain these levels by location, you can do so on the Location

Settings tab (described below).

 The Total Available counter is the sum of Total Checked-Out and Total In-House.

 The Total Checked-Out counter is the quantity of this item that is currently Checked-Out.

 The Total In-House counter is the Total Available less the Total Checked-Out.

 The Total On Order counter is the quantity of this item that is currently included on an active Pick Order.

 The Total Buildable is the quantity that can be built of this Assembly Item based on the inventory levels of the component items.

 The Committed counter is the number of this Assembly Item that has been committed to a pick order.

7.2.3 Location Settings Tab:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Complete the fields on this screen as described below:

Only one primary location can be selected per site.

 Site and Location - Click in the box and select a Site and Location from the drop down list. Only sites and locations you have previously selected will appear in this list. Select More to view the Site or Location List. You can also select New

Location or New Site to access the Create New screen. These represent the site and the location where the inventory will reside.

 Quantity - This number is populated from the Inventory for this item. This number displays how many of this item is currently in stock at the selected site and location.

When you first create your item, this number will be zero. After you build your

Assembly Item, this field will reflect the number you built (which is the quantity in stock).

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Min Stock Level - Enter the minimum number of this item that you want to have in stock for the selected Site and Location. This number can be 0 or a positive number, negative numbers are not allowed.

For further information on setting this option, please refer to the

For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

topic.

After you have completed all fields, hit ENTER to begin a new line. Your screen will look similar to the following after hitting ENTER:

7.2.4 Assembly Tab:

This is the tab where you will indicate which items you want included in this Assembly Item. You can select any Inventoried, Non-inventoried and/or Assembly item.

To select items to include in your Assembly Item:

InventoryControl Printable Help

the Item Number field, select which item you want to add to this assembly. If you select Full

List, the Item List will be filtered by the Type you selected (i.e., if Non-Inventory is selected, only non-inventory items will appear on the Item List.

When you tab out of the Item Number field after selecting an item, the Description, Stocking

Unit and Total In-House fields will populate with the information for that item. of this items is included with each build of this Assembly Item.

Example: Assume this Assembly Item is a cabinet. For each cabinet, you need 2 long panels, 2 short panels and one back piece and 6 screws. When you enter the long panel item on this tab, you will enter 2 in the Quantity field. When you enter the screws item on this tab, you will enter 6 in the Quantity field, etc. permanently remove the item from inventory during the Disassembly process. You might use this option for a non-inventory item such as a box used for packaging the Assembly Item.

If the Always Scrap checkbox is not selected, the on hand amount for the item will be increased during Disassembly (the item is assumed to be returned to inventory rather than removed after

Disassembly.)

screen will appear similar to the following after pressing ENTER:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: The cost will be calculated and updated based on your selections on this tab unless you have checked the Do Not Override Cost on the General Tab checkbox located at the bottom of the

Assembly Information tab.

7.2.5 Additional Information Tab:

When you have finished entering information on the Assembly tab, click the Additional tab. The

Additional Information tab provides optional fields where other information about the Item can be recorded. An example of this tab is shown below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Complete the fields on this tab as described below:

 Stocking Unit is the portion by which the quantity will be tracked. At the item level, this should be "Eaches", meaning you should enter how you want each item of this type to be measured. (Examples: bag, barrel, basket, block, bottle, box, carton, container, drum, gallon, jar, pack, package, pallet, section, tub, vial, etc.)

You will have the opportunity on the Managing Suppliers tab to enter the Order Unit used by the supplier for shipping purposes (Box, Pallet, Lot, etc.). The Order Unit will be used when creating Purchase Orders rather than the "Eaches" UOM that is entered on this tab. Please see the Managing Suppliers Tab section, below.

 Dimension Unit is the increment to be used for Length, Width and Height. (Examples: inch, foot, yard, millimeter, centimeter, meter, etc.)

 Length is the length of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Width is the width of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Height is the height of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Weight Unit is the increment to be used for mass. (Examples: ounce, pound, ton, milligram, gram, kilogram, metric ton, etc.)

100

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Weight is the mass of one Unit of Measure expressed in Weight Units.

 Manager is used to record the name of someone who manages this inventory item.

 Add Notes allows you to record any additional information.

7.2.6 Manage Suppliers Tab:

This tab allows you to identify which suppliers you will use for this item and enter detailed supplier information, such as unit of measure.

Adding Suppliers to an Item:

To use this tab you must first select suppliers for this item in the Supplier screen. To do this: enabled. create a new supplier.

3. Enter the SKU number for this item in the Supplier Item SKU field.

4. Enter the description of this item given by the supplier in the Supplier Item Description field.

101

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. Enter the number of days lead time the supplier needs to process orders for this item in the Lead

Time (in days) field. The lead time is the time from the requisition date to the delivery date. For example, if you need the item by the 15th of the month and the supplier requires 5 days to deliver the order, you would enter 5 here to ensure the order is sent to the supplier timely. by making a new selection from the drop down menu.

7. You can make this the default supplier for this item by checking the Make this the default Supplier

while ordering this item checkbox (Pro and Enterprise versions only). When this is selected, this supplier will automatically populate purchase orders for this item. You can change the supplier on the purchase order, if needed.

8. Any notes entered for this supplier will appear in the Notes section.

9. You can enter the supplier's unit of measure settings in the Order Unit Settings screen (Pro and

Enterprise versions only). This is the unit used by the supplier when shipping this item. This may be box, pallet, etc. This is different from the "Eaches" stocking unit you entered on the Additional tab. For example, you may have entered "jar" for the stocking unit on the Additional tab, but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars. When creating purchase orders, you would want to specify the Order Unit as box rather then jar (or you could end up with 100 boxes of jars rather than 100 jars).

10. When you are done entering supplier information, click the Custom Texts or Custom Numbers and

Dates tab (these tabs are optional).

Deleting Suppliers from an Item:

1. Highlight the supplier you want to delete from this item in the Supplier screen.

7.2.7 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab:

Using Custom

Fields

7.2.8 Saving the New Item:

When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

102

InventoryControl Printable Help

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

7.3 Building Assembly Items

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: This feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory or the Standard version of InventoryControl.

For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

After you create your Assembly Items (see the

Creating An Assembly Item

topic), you can "build" your

Assembly Items as needed using the Assembly feature. Building Assembly Items can be thought of as the "manufacturing" portion of the Assembly Item feature. When you Build an Assembly Item, the on hand amounts for the sub-items are reduced by the number needed to make the Assembly Item, and the on hand amount for the Assembly Item is increased. Assembling/Building Assembly Items increases inventory for the Assembly Item in the same way that Adding increases inventory for other item types.

Building an Assembly Item is a two part process. First, you will select which Assembly Item you want to build (add inventory to), next you will remove the sub-items from inventory. In other words, since your

Assembly item is made up of other items, you have to remove the sub-items in order to add inventory to the Assembly Item.

Adding vs. Assembling: Keep in mind that while you can use the Add feature to add inventory to an

Assembly item,

doing this will not affect the inventory amounts for the sub items

. You should only use Add if you want to add inventory to an Assembly Item due to a return (you can also use the Adjust feature for this). To increase your inventory for an Assembly Item and decrease your inventory for the sub-items, use the Assembly feature.

To Assemble Items:

103

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Builds at one Location, for example. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. The

Build Assembly button does not have to be clicked between each scan to post these transactions to the Pending Transaction List. If any additional information, such as serial numbers is needed for one or more sub-items tied to this Assembly Item, you will be taken to the

Remove screen so you can add this information. See below for information on using the

Remove screen.

Clicking the button will unlock the field. drop down list will display the last five items selected. Click More to view the Item List. The

Item List will be filtered to only show Assembly Items. Click New to

create a new Assembly

Item.

4. If one of the sub-items has a default location, that location will appear in the Location field. If more than one sub-item has a default location, the field will appear blank. You can change the

Location by clicking on the field and entering a new location.

5. Now you can enter the quantity you want to build. Note that the system tells you the maximum number you can build. This number is based on how many of each sub-item you on hand.

104

InventoryControl Printable Help

6. You can optionally enter Cost. This Cost reflects the cost of the entire Assembly Item (including sub-items).

7. You can optionally enter Notes.

8. If you setup any Track By fields when you created this Assembly Item, the Track By section will be enabled. These Track By fields are tied to the entire Assembly Item (including sub-items).

9. When you have entered all required information (Item Number, Location and any required

Track Bys), the Build Assembly button will be enabled.

The Build Assembly button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Remove is posted to the Pending Transaction List.

Click this button to continue building your item. If no additional information (such as serial numbers) is needed for any of the associated sub-items, you can click Commit at this point to complete the build process.

If additional information is needed for one or more items, the Remove screen appears.

105

InventoryControl Printable Help

This Remove screen displays all items tied to this Assembly Item. Those items that appear checked as in the example above are ready to be built.

Items that are not checked need additional information, usually a Track By.

10. In the Item Number field, enter the Item Number, or highlight an unchecked item in the display screen. The selected item's information will populate the screen.

11. Enter any missing information, usually a Track By such as Serial Number. When you are tracking by serial number, click on the Serial Number drop down to see a list of all unique serial numbers associated with the selected item. You can also scan this information.

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

106

InventoryControl Printable Help

12. Click Next when you have completed entering the requested information. You will be returned to the Assembly screen. You can choose another Assembly Item to build, or click Commit to commit your changes to the database.

When you click Commit, the inventory quantities for the listed items will be reduced and the quantity for the Assembly Item will be increased by the number built.

7.4 Disassembling Assembly Items

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The process of Disassembling Assembly Items will reduce your inventory for the Assembly Item and increase your inventory of the associated sub-items. You will be Removing inventory for the Assembly

Item and Adding inventory to the sub-items, unless the sub-item has been marked to be scrapped

Scrapping an item means that inventory will be reduced for that item during the Disassembly process.

You can mark the sub-item as "Always Scrap" during the Assembly Item creation process so that it will always be scrapped when disassembled. This is useful for packaging materials, such as boxes, that will not be returned to inventory.

To Disassemble Assembly Items:

107

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Disassembles at one

Location, for example. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. The Disassemble button does not have to be clicked between each scan to post these transactions to the Pending Transaction List. If any additional information, such as serial numbers is needed for one or more sub-items tied to this Assembly Item, you will be taken to the

Add screen so you can add this information. See below for information on using the Add screen.

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

Disassemble. The drop down list will display the last five items selected. Click More to view the

Item List. The Item List will be filtered to only show Assembly Items.

4. If this Assembly Item is only in one location, that location will appear in the Location field. If the item exists in more than one location, click the drop down menu and select More to view the

Location List.

5. Enter the quantity you want to disassemble. The Maximum number that appears directly below this field indicates the amount of this item that you have in inventory. You cannot disassemble more than you have in inventory.

6. The current date will appear in the Disassemble Date field. You can keep this date, or enter a different date on which the Disassembly will occur. If you enter a future date, the inventory counts for the Assembly Item and component items will not be affected until that date.

Remember that this is the serial number for the Assembly Item as a whole (entered on the

General tab of the Create New/Edit Assembly Item screen). fields.

108

InventoryControl Printable Help

9. You can optionally enter a Customer in the Customer field.

10. When you have completed the information on this screen, click Disassemble.

The Disassemble button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Add is posted to the

Pending Transaction List.

If any of the component items are tracked (by serial number, for example), you will be taken to the Add screen after you click Disassemble.

The Add screen lists all component items for this Assembly Item. Items that appear with a green checkmark are ready to be added.

Items that are not checked need additional information, usually a Track By.

Note: If this Assembly Item has been modified, the View Config History button, shown below, will appear at the top of the screen.

109

InventoryControl Printable Help

Click this button to view a list of all previous configurations. The View Config History screen appears.

To switch to a previous configuration, highlight a listing and click the Use This Configuration button.

11. In the Item Number field, enter the Item Number, or highlight an item in the display screen. The selected item's information will populate the screen.

12. Select a location for this item (if there is only one location or that item has a primary location, this will appear in the Location field).

13. Select the Scrap checkbox if you want to scrap, or discard, this item. This means the inventory for this item will not be increased. You would use this if the item is damaged or you do not want to return it to your inventory for some reason.

You can also optionally enter a reason if you choose to scrap this item.

14. Enter any missing information, usually a Track By such as Serial Number. You can also scan this information.

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field

110

InventoryControl Printable Help

you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Builds at one Location, for example. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. This feature is especially useful when scanning serial numbers.

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

15. Click Add when you have entered the requested information. The item will now be check marked

16. Click Next to continue. You will be returned to the Disassemble screen. You can choose another Assembly Item to build, or click Commit to commit your changes to the database. in the list.

When you click Commit, the inventory quantities for the listed items will be increased and the quantity for the Assembly Item will be decreased by the number disassembled. Keep in mind that if an item is marked as "Always Scrap" on the Create New/Edit Item screen, or you have selected the Scrap option on this screen, the inventory for that item will not be increased.

111

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 8 - Using the List Screens

8.1 Working with Lists

Upgrading on the Main screen.

This software contains easy to use List screens that allow you to view and access a variety of information quickly. Screens that use the list view are Customer, Manufacturer, Item, Location, Site, Supplier,

Inventory, Transaction, Purchase Order and Pick Order. Each of these screens can be accessed by clicking the Lists icon on the Main screen.

Note: These screens all function the same; however, individual options may vary for each screen. This topic covers how to use all possible functions available on the list screens. Keep in mind that not all list screens contain all functions mentioned here.

112

InventoryControl Printable Help

Below is an example of the basic list screen layout. This is an example of the Inventory List. This screen can be divided into three sections (labeled A through C in the example below):

A. Toolbar

B. Contents List

C. Buttons

In addition to these menus there are also "Context-Sensitive Menus" that appear when you right-click on certain areas of the screen. These provide another way to access many of the functions available in the toolbar. These types of menus are also discussed later in this section. Note: The Check In/Out functions do not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

8.1.1 Section A: Toolbar

Note: The Check In/Out functions do not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

113

InventoryControl Printable Help

The toolbar at the top of the list screen provides quick access to a variety of functions and also allows you to customize how the information on the list is displayed. Each of these functions is described below:

Button Description

Filter

Toggle

Filter accesses the Find screen allowing you to quickly lookup information. For more information on the Find screen, please see

Searching for Information

The Toggle button is enabled after you have used the Filter feature to limit the list to certain information. Click the Toggle button to view all listings again. For instance, if you have filtered your Item List to display only items with Monitor in the description field, you can click the Toggle button to display all items on the list again. Click Toggle again and the list will again be filtered by your selection.

Check-In

Check-Out

Move

Inventory

Add

Inventory

Remove

Inventory

Edit

New

Duplicate

Export to

File

(Applies to the Item and Inventory List screens only.)

Highlight a listing that is Checked Out, then click the Check-In button. The Check-In screen allows you to Check-In inventory that has previously been Checked Out to one or more customers. While checking in inventory does not actually add inventory (quantity) to an item, it does free up that inventory to be checked-out to another customer, if needed, or to be included in a pick order. For more information, please refer to the

Checking In Inventory

of your inventory is currently located. For more information, please refer to the

(Applies to the Item, Inventory and Customer List screens only.) Highlight a listing, then click the Check-Out button. The Check-Out screen allows you to check-out, or assign, inventory to customers. For more information, please refer to the

Checking Out Inventory

topic.

(Applies to the Location and Inventory List screens only.)

Highlight a listing, then click the

Move button. The Move screen allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one

Location to another. When you create an item, you can add which locations it may be. When you then add inventory (quantity) to the item, you select in which location that quantity will reside.

The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another. By moving inventory in the software, you can easily keep accurate records of where all

Moving

Inventory

(Applies to the Item and Inventory List screens only.)

Highlight a listing, then click the Add

Inventory button, or just click the button to access the Add screen. The Add screen allows you to manually add quantity to items already entered into your database. Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item. Items must first be imported or entered on the Create New Item screen (by selecting Lists > Item List > New) before you can add quantity to it. For more information, please refer to the

Adding Inventory

(Applies to the Item and Inventory List screens only.)

Highlight a listing, then click the

Remove button, or just click the button to access the Remove screen. The Remove Inventory screen allows you to remove quantity from any item in the database. For more information,

of Items. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

Removing Inventory

topic.

Highlight a listing on the screen, then click the Edit button. The Edit screen appears allowing you to update and change information.

Accesses the New screen allowing you to enter a new Customer, Item, Manufacturer, Site,

Supplier, Purchase Order or Pick Order.

Highlight a listing, then click the Duplicate button. The New screen appears with all fields populated with the information from the listing you copied.

Export allows you to export the entire list to a comma-delimited text file.

What is a comma-delimited file?

This is a type of data format in which each piece of data is separated by a comma. This is a popular format for transferring data from one application to another, because most database

114

InventoryControl Printable Help systems are able to import and export comma-delimited data.

For example, data pulled from a database and represented in comma-delimited format looks something like the following. Each column value is separated by a comma from the next column’s value and each row starts a new line:

Adams, Jane, 46, female, New York

Doe, John, 32, male, California

Jones, Sam, 13, male, Texas

Smith, Mary, 64, female, Louisiana

When data is represented in comma-delimited format they also are referred to as commaseparated values, abbreviated CSV.

When the Export button is selected, a screen appears allowing you to specify where the exported data will be saved on your computer. An example of the Export screen is shown below:

Make sure you save this to a location you can remember. You must also choose a name for your file on this screen. After you have made your selections, click Save to export your data.

A confirmation message will appear when your data has been successfully exported by the system.

115

Print

InventoryControl Printable Help

Print allows you to print the list. When this button is selected, a standard Page Setup screen appears allowing you to enter margins. An example of this screen is shown below:

Group By

Click the OK button on the Page Setup screen to print the list. The list will print to your default printer.

The list screens provide you with the capability of "grouping" the displayed information so you can view data in a way that is most easy-to-read for you. You can have one group, two groups, or many groups depending on how you want to view your information. For instance, if you want all inventory on the Inventory List to be displayed grouped by location, you can quickly set this up.

To see the grouping options, click the Group By button. The top of the list screen expands to display the group selections as shown below:

Creating Groups

To create a new group, click on a column header, then drag it to the space indicated on the

116

InventoryControl Printable Help

screen. For example, if you want to group information by Location, click on the Location column header and drag it to the indicated space.

The screen now lists Location as one of your groups and the items are grouped according to what

Location they are assigned.

You can create additional groups to further organize your information by continuing to drag and drop column headers.

By default, the groups list information in ascending order (Location 001, Location 002, etc.). You can change this to descending order by clicking on the group name. Notice that after you click on the group name, the arrow next to the name is now pointing in the opposite direction and the information on the screen is reorganized.

Deleting Groups

If you no longer want to display information in a particular group you can easily ungroup the data.

For instance, if you have created a group for Location but now wish to remove it, you can do so by clicking on the group name and dragging it down into the column header section. Let go of your cursor anywhere in the column header section and the group disappears.

117

InventoryControl Printable Help

The information contained in that group still appears on the display screen, but it is no longer grouped together.

Hidden

Columns

Hidden Columns - The list allows you to hide columns by right-clicking on a column label and selecting Hide Column. This enables you to hide information you do not usually need.

You can view the columns you have hidden by right clicking on any column and selecting Show

Hidden Columns. A pop-up screen similar to the one below appears listing all columns that are not currently visible.

Show

Associated

Tranx

(Transaction

List Only)

You can return these columns to the full List screen by double-clicking on a listing in the Hidden

Columns screen and dragging it back to the column labels section on the List screen.

Assembly and Kit Items Only.

This button shows any transactions related to Kit or Assembly

Items. For example, Assembling an Item creates a Remove transaction for each component item and Disassembling an Item creates an Add transaction for each component item. Removing a

Kit Item creates a Remove transaction for each related item as well. To view these transactions, highlight an Assembly or Kit Item and click the Show Associated Tranx button. The

Transaction List will display any transactions associated with the selected Assembly or Kit Item.

Below is an example of the Transaction List displaying the associated transactions created when an Assembly Item was Assembled (added). Notice that the Assembly Item's Add transaction is listed in the top grid and the associated Remove transactions for each item

118

included in the Assembly Item is listed in the bottom grid.

InventoryControl Printable Help

To return to the full list of Transactions, click the Close button.

8.1.2 Section B: Contents List

The contents list displays all data related to the selected list. For example, if you selected Inventory, all

Inventory entered in the system will display here, if you selected Manufactures, all manufacturers will display here, etc.

119

InventoryControl Printable Help

Sorting Columns: Most of the columns that appear in the lists can be sorted ascending or descending.

The columns sort ascending by default. To change the sort order, click on the column heading. An arrow will appear next to the column name to let you know in which direction the information is sorted. The example below shows the Last Name column sorted Ascending.

Selecting a Listing: You can quickly scroll through the listings using the buttons directly below the contents list. Keep in mind that you can also use the Filter button to limit the items that appear in the list

(see Section A: Toolbars, above). The list screens can display up to 1000 lines of information at a time.

If your list contains more than 1000 items, you must create a filter to show the items not on the list.

Click on a listing to highlight it, then click the button that accesses the desired function. For example, if you want to edit Item 10002, use your mouse to click on that listing in your Item List, then click the Edit button.

Arranging Columns: You can arrange the columns in the list into any order you wish. To change the order, click on a column heading and drag it somewhere else on the list. For example, if you want to make Location the first column in your Inventory List, click on the Location column heading and drag it to the first column in the list as shown below:

After you drop the column into its new position, the list will reorganize with the Group information appearing first:

120

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.1.3 Section C: Buttons:

This section contains the following buttons:

Help (F1) - Click this button (or hit the F1 key on your keyboard) to access this help document.

Close - Click this button to close the List. Keep in mind when closing the list that your groups and column settings will be retained.

8.1.4 Context-Sensitive Menus:

The software provides you with a toolbar for quick access to various list features and, in addition, many of these features can also be accessed via "context-sensitive menus". By right-clicking on a column heading, a list of available features appears, as shown below (Note that not all options shown below are available on all screens):

Any changes you make to the list via this menu will be retained when the screen is closed and reopened.

This menu allows you to:

Sort ASC - Select this option to sort the column in ascending order (A through Z or 1 through 10, etc.).

Sort DESC - Select this option to sort the column in descending order (Z through A or 10 through 1, etc.).

Group By this Column - Select this option to group the screen by the selected column. Please see

Section A - Toolbar above for more information on grouping.

Show Grouping - Select this option to show the groups selected for this list screen. Please see Section

A - Toolbar above for more information on grouping.

121

InventoryControl Printable Help

Hide Columns - The list allows you to hide columns by right-clicking on a column label and selecting

Hide Column. This enables you to hide information you do not usually need. When you hide a column, it will remain hidden until you manually return it to the List screen by following the instructions below.

Show Hidden Columns - You can quickly view the columns you have hidden by right clicking on any column and selecting Show Hidden Columns (or by clicking the Show Hidden button). A pop-up screen similar to the one below appears listing all columns that are not currently visible.

You can return these columns to the full List screen by clicking on a listing in the Hidden Columns screen and dragging it back to the column labels section on the List screen.

122

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.2 Item List Example

The Item List displays all items you have entered in the system. Below is an example of this screen:

The Item List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list

Inventory. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

123

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.3 Inventory List Example

The Inventory List displays all items that have inventory (quantity) in the software. Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item. Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity to it. The Check In and Check Out feature does not apply to WaspNest

Inventory.

The Inventory List allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print a list of

topic.

124

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.4 Site List Example

The Site List displays all sites you have setup in the system. Note: WaspNest Inventory only allows you to have one site.

The Site List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list of Sites. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

topic.

125

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.5 Location List Example

The Location List displays all locations you have setup in your system. Below is an example of the

Location List:

The Location List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list of Locations. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

Working with

Lists

topic.

126

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.6 Customer List Example

The Customer List displays all customers you have setup in the software. A customer is any person or entity to whom you check-out, receive or send (pick) inventory.

Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Customer List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list of Customers. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

127

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.7 Manufacturer List

The Manufacturer List displays all manufacturers you have setup in the system.

The Manufacturer List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or

Print the list of Manufacturers. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

topic.

128

8.8 Supplier List

The Supplier List displays all suppliers you have setup in the system.

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Supplier List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list of Suppliers. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

Working with

Lists

topic.

129

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.9 Pick Order List Example

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Pick Order List displays all active pick orders entered in the system. Active pick orders are those that have a status of New, New-Over Due, In Process or In Process-Over Due. Below is an example of the Pick Order List.

Notice the red flags next to some of the orders on the list. These red flags indicate that the order is past due. The status may be New-Past Due or In Process-Past Due. Overdue orders will appear at the top of the list by default, but you can reorder the list as needed.

The Pick Order List screen allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list of Pick Orders. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

130

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.10 Purchase Order List Example

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Purchase Order List displays all active purchase orders you have in your system. Active purchase orders are those that have a status of New, New-Over Due, In Process or In Process-Over Due. Below is an example of the Purchase Order List.

The Purchase Order List allows you to Edit, create New, Copy, Delete, Show, Filter, Export or Print the list of Purchase Orders. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

topic.

131

InventoryControl Printable Help

8.11 Transaction List Example

The Transaction List displays all transactions (add, move, remove, etc.) that have occurred in the system along with the date of the transactions and the user who performed them. Below is an example of the Transaction List:

The Transaction List screen allows you to Filter, Export or Print the list of Transactions. For detailed information regarding each of these options, refer to the

topic. The Associated

Tranx button applies to Assembly and Kit Items only. For more information about the Associated Tranx button, refer to the

Toolbar section of the Working with Lists topic

Keep in mind that the list screens only display a maximum of 1000 rows. If the dates for which you are looking are not shown in the list, use the Filter function to display the records you need.

132

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 9 - Inventory

9.1 Inventory Menu

The Inventory Menu groups tasks such as Adding/Removing, Moving, Checking In/Out, Adjusting and

Auditing inventory into one place. The Checking In/Out feature does not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

To Access the Inventory Menu:

From the Main screen, click the Inventory icon. The Inventory Menu appears at the bottom of the screen.

Click on any of the Inventory Menu icons to go to that function. Detailed descriptions of the options found on the Inventory Menu are provided below:

 Add - The Add screen allows you to add inventory (quantity) to an item at a specified location.

This allows you to "manually" add quantity to an item rather than receiving the inventory through a fulfilled Purchase Order. For more information on adding inventory, please refer to the

Adding

Inventory

topic. For more information on receiving inventory, please refer to the Receiving

Inventory topic.

 Remove - The Remove screen allows you to remove inventory (quantity) from an item at a specified location. This allows you to "manually" remove quantity from an item rather than removing it through a pick order. For more information on removing inventory, please refer to the

Removing Inventory

topic. For more information on pick orders, please refer to the Creating

Pick Orders topic.

133

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Move - The Move screen allows you to move inventory for an item from one Location to another.

When you add inventory (quantity) to an item, you select in which location that quantity will reside. The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another. By moving inventory in the software, you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located. For more information on the Move screen, please refer to the

Moving Inventory

 Check-In - The Check-In screen allows you to check-in, or make available, inventory that has previously been Checked-Out to one or more customers. While checking in does not actually add inventory to an item, it does free up that inventory to be checked-out to another customer, if needed, or to be included in a pick order. For more information on the Check-In screen, please refer to the

Checking In Inventory

Adjust screen, please refer to the

 Check-Out - The Check-Out screen allows you to check-out, or assign, inventory to a customer for a specified length of time. For more information on the Check-Out screen, please refer to the

Checking Out Inventory

topic.

 Adjust - The Adjust screen allows you to modify the quantity of existing items. Adjust is like a

"mini" Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO (First In First Out) to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here. The Adjust function is useful if too much or too little quantity is accidentally entered for an item (on a mobile device, for example), inventory is lost, found, broken, etc. and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item. Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the Audit function makes other functions of the software, such as adding inventory, unavailable to ensure inventory is not added or removed while you are doing the counts. All features are still available when adjusting inventory. For more information on the

Adjusting Inventory

 Assemble -

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

- This icon opens the Build Assembly screen.

Build Assembly allows you to add inventory to your Assembly Items. The Build process adds inventory to the Assembly Item while decreasing inventory for the component items. For more information on the Assemble screen, please refer to the

Building Assembly Items

topic.

 Disassemble -

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

- This icon opens the Disassemble screen.

Disassemble allows you to decrease inventory for your Assembly Items. The Disassemble process removes inventory for the Assembly Item while increasing inventory for the component items. For more information on the Disassemble screen, please refer to the

Disassembling

Assembly Items

topic.

 Audit - This icon starts the Audit Mode of the software. Audit Mode allows you to check the counts of all your inventory while disabling other features, such as add and remove, to make sure inventory counts in the system do not change while you are performing the audit. If you are using mobile devices, you can use them simultaneously with the PC to perform an audit. For more information on Auditing, please refer to the

Auditing Your Inventory

. For more information on adding inventory on the WDT2200 mobile device, please refer to the

134

InventoryControl Printable Help

9.2 Manually Adding Inventory

The Add Inventory screen allows you to manually add quantity to items already entered into your database. Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item. Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity to it.

Inventory is also added when you add inventory on the mobile devices. For more information on adding inventory on the Wasp 3200 mobile device, please refer to the topic

Windows Mobile Device - Adding

Inventory

topic

WDT2200 - Adding Inventory

Note: All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition. The screens and available features in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ. For more information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Pro and Enterprise Version Users Only:

Inventory is also added when you receive inventory from a purchase order. For further information on receiving inventory on the PC, please refer to the topic

Receiving Inventory

Pro and Enterprise Version Users Only:

Keep in mind that if you want to increase inventory amounts for Assembly Items, you should use the Build Assembly feature rather than the Add feature. Build

Assembly will adjust the inventory amounts for all component items. You can use the Add feature if you want to add inventory to the Assembly Item only, without changing the inventory amounts for the component items, such as in the case of a returned item. Use the Add feature for this carefully, so you do not cause the system to have incorrect inventory amounts for the component items.

You cannot Add Non-inventory or Kit items.

Manually Adding Inventory:

of the screen.

135

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location,.

Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. (The Add button does not have to be clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the

Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

(if you accessed this screen from the Item List, this field will already be populated). To enter an

Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database, select <more> on the drop down list to see all items in the

Item List

or you can create a new item.

Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields:

 Location

 Quantity (unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number - Set on the Add or Edit

Item screens, which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1)

136

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Cost

 Date Acquired

 Any of the associated Track By fields: Serial Number, Date Code, Lot or Pallet

(Set on the Add or Edit Item screens). A Track By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created. Note: The Track By fields are not available in WaspNest

Inventory.

Below is an example of the screen with all fields enabled:

You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field or select <New> from the Item Number, Location or Supplier drop down lists to open the

Create New Item, Create New Location or Create New Supplier screens.

Note: If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen, the Create New Item,

Create New Location or Create New Supplier screens will be opened automatically if an unknown Item Number, Location, or Supplier is entered. If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Item Number, Location or Supplier is entered, a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen. For more information on enabling and disabling the

Automatic New option, please refer to the

Options

). For further information on Picking Orders, please refer to the topic

The No. of Labels field determines the number of item labels that will be printed when the transaction is completed if the Print checkbox is selected. The No. of Labels value defaults to the Quantity value but can be modified. The maximum number of labels for this field is 1000.

The item label used for this function is named AddTransactionItemLabel.lab and can be modified through the Labels interface. the Item Number you enter. If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item, these fields will be disabled. Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the

Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen. Note: The Track By fields are not available in WaspNest Inventory.

5. Complete the rest of the screen: If a Supplier and/or Ref # is required for this item, you can enter it now. Similar to Tracked By fields, the requirement that one or more of these fields be filled out is established at the time the item was entered on the Create New Item screen and can be edited on the Edit Item screen.

The Ref # drop down list displays the last ten Ref #s used. The <More> option of the Ref # drop down list displays all Ref #s with active quantity.

137

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Supplier drop down list displays the last ten suppliers used. The <More> option of the

Supplier drop down list displays all suppliers that can be chosen (active suppliers).

The No. of Labels field determines the number of item labels that will be printed if the Print checkbox is checked. The value in this field defaults to the Quantity field value.

The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

6. You can optionally enter the Customer if you want to track return information.

7. When you have finished entering information, click the Add button to post the transaction to the

Pending Transaction List. All fields on the Add Inventory screen will be cleared and all but the

Item Number field will be disabled. You can either select another item to be added to the

Pending Transaction List or you can click Commit to submit the transaction(s).

The Add button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Add is posted to the Pending

Transaction List.

At any time, you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error.

138

InventoryControl Printable Help

8. If you want to print a receipt of this transaction, enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on

Commit - Copies field.

Labels field. The file used to print this label is named AddTransactionItemLabel.lab and can be customized through the

Labels

feature.

If the Print Labels box is not checked when you click Commit, but there is a quantity in the No. of

Labels field, you will see the following message:

Click Yes to continue without printing labels. Click No to print the designated number of labels.

139

InventoryControl Printable Help

9.3 Removing Inventory

The Remove Inventory screen allows you to remove quantity from any item in the database. This can be considered the same as shipping inventory. You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen. Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item. Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity or remove quantity.

Inventory is also removed when you pick items for a Pick Order (

Applies to Pro and Enterprise

Versions only

Picking Orders

The Remove function uses FIFO (First in First Out) to determine what inventory is removed first. If you

Add 5 of Item 123 to Location Bin 1, for example, then another 5 come in on another day, you will have ten of that item. When you later remove 3 of Item 123, the first set of 5 will be subtracted from inventory before the second set.

Removing Inventory from an Item:

the screen.

140

InventoryControl Printable Help

To prevent fields from clearing, click the Pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock for subsequent transactions. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple removes at one Location, for example. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly remove inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. (The Remove button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these remove transactions to the Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

3. Complete the Item fields: Enter the Item Number of the item from which you want to remove inventory. To enter an Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the first 10 Items shown there, or select <more> to select an Item from the Item List. You can only Remove quantity from items with quantity greater than 0. The Item Number list on this screen will not display or accept numbers that do not have quantity.

Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields:

 Quantity (unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number - Set on the Add or

Edit Item screens, which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1).

 Location

 Any of the associated Tracked By fields: The Track By fields do not apply to

WaspNest Inventory. Serial Number, Date Code, Lot or Pallet (Set on the Add or Edit Item screens). A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created.

141

 Customer

 Notes

Below is an example of the Remove screen with the fields enabled:

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field.

Note: If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen, the Create New Customer screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Customer is entered. If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Customer is entered, a prompt will ask if you want to use the

Create New screen. For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New option,

Options

4. Complete the Track By fields: The Track By fields do not apply to WaspNest Inventory. As mentioned above, the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter. If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item, these fields will be disabled. Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen.

Since you can only remove existing quantity, if the Tracked By item you are removing is not in the list, make sure you have the right Item Number and Location. The Tracked By fields will only show values that are possible for the selected Item Number and Location. (If an item with a given Serial

Number is not in the list, it may be Checked-Out, and thus, not removable.) If you still do not see the Tracked By information you expect, you should make sure the selected Item Number at the

142

InventoryControl Printable Help

selected Location exists and has quantity. Also check that you are using the right Site.

5. Enter the Customer: Select a Customer from the drop down list. Select <New> from the

Customer drop list to open the Create New Customer screen.

The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

6. After you have completed entering the information, click the Remove button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List. All fields on the Remove screen will be cleared and all but the Item

Number field will be disabled. You can either select another item to be removed or you can click

Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction(s).

The Remove button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Remove is posted to the Pending

Transaction List.

At any time, you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error.

7. If you want to print a receipt of this transaction, enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on

Commit - Copies field.

143

InventoryControl Printable Help

9.4 Moving Inventory

The Move Inventory screen allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one Location to another. When you create an item, you can add which locations it may be. When you then add inventory

(quantity) to the item, you select in which location that quantity will reside. The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another. By moving inventory in the software, you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located.

You can only move inventory that is listed in the system as having a quantity greater than 0 (quantity is added on the Add Inventory screen or when Receiving inventory.)

Note: The Track By section does not apply to WaspNest Inventory.

Moving Inventory to a Different Location:

the screen.

2. Highlight the item for which you want to move inventory, then click the Move icon. The Move screen appears.

144

InventoryControl Printable Help

To prevent fields from clearing, click the Pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock for subsequent transactions. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple removes at one Location, for example. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly remove inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. (The Move button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these remove transactions to the Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

3. Complete the Item Fields: To Move inventory, first enter the Item Number of the item you want to move. To enter an Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the 10 items shown or use <more> to select an item from the Item List.

When you enter an item number, the Item Number field is populated as well as the Description and the following fields are enabled:

 From Location (filtered by Site)

 Quantity (unless the item is Tracked By serial number, then the quantity defaults to 1 and cannot be changed),

 To Location

 Any of the associated Track By fields: Serial Number, Date Code, Lot or Pallet. A

Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the Item is created.

 Notes

Below is an example of the Move screen with the fields enabled:

145

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field. The

To Location field is not enabled until the From Location information is entered.

Note: If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen, the Create New Location screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Location is entered. If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Location is entered, a prompt will ask if you want to use the

Create New screen. For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New

Options

4. Complete the Track By fields: Note: Security does not apply to WaspNest Inventory. As mentioned above, the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter. If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item, these fields will be disabled. Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen.

Since you can only move existing quantity, if the Tracked By item you are removing is not in the list, make sure you have the right Item Number and Location. The Tracked By fields will only show values that are possible for the selected Item Number and Location. (If an item with a given Serial Number is not in the list, it may be Checked-Out, and thus, not removable.) If you still do not see the Tracked By information you expect, you should make sure the selected Item

Number at the selected Location exists and has quantity. Also check that you are using the right Site.

5. Enter where you want the inventory moved: After Tracked By information is entered, choose the To Location (where the Inventory is being moved).

The Notes fields allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

146

InventoryControl Printable Help

6. After you have entered the information on the screen, click the Move button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List. All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled. You can either select another item to be added to

Pending Transaction List or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction(s).

The Move button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one move is posted to the Pending

Transaction List.

At any time, you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error.

147

InventoryControl Printable Help

9.5 Checking In Inventory

The Check-In screen allows you to Check-In inventory that has previously been Checked-Out to one or more customers. While checking in inventory does not actually add inventory (quantity) to an item, it does free up that inventory to be checked-out to another customer or to be included in a pick order.

Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Checking In Inventory:

the screen.

2. Highlight the item for which you want to check-in inventory, then click the Check-In icon. The

Check-In screen appears.

148

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location, for example. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. (The

Add button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the

Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

3. Complete the Item fields: To Check-In Inventory, first enter the Item Number of the inventory item you want to Check-In. To input an Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the Item List.

Entering an item number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description and Check-In

Location and will enable the following fields:

 Quantity (unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number - Set on the Add or Edit Item screens, which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1)

 Any of the associated Tracked By fields: Serial Number, Date Code, Lot or Pallet (Set on the Add or Edit Item screens). A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created.

Below is an example of the Check-In screen with the fields enabled:

The Maximum field displays the quantity of this item currently Checked-Out.

To enter a customer, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list.

149

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can only check-In inventory from a customer that was previously entered on the Create New

Customer screen and only customers who have items checked-out will appear in the Customer List.

After a customer is selected, the customer information is displayed.

4. Complete the Track By fields: As mentioned above, the Track By fields are enabled based on the

Item Number you enter. If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item, these fields will be disabled. Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New

Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen.

If the item being checked-in is tracked by Serial Number, after the Serial Number is entered, the default location in the Location drop down list will be the location from which the Item was checkedout.

For items not tracked by Serial Number, the default check-in location is the first location of all the locations from which this customer has this item checked-out. For example, if a customer has an item checked out from three locations - A, B, and C - Location A will become the default location when the Item Number is entered.

5. Enter the Check-In Location: The locations included in the Locations drop down list are also limited by any other tracked by options that may have been enabled for this item. Thus, the listed locations will:

1. Have an item Checked-Out by the selected customer

and

2. Match all other Track By options enabled for this item

Using the previous example, if the Track By Lot option is enabled, and the Lot for the item at

Locations A and B is 123, but the Lot for this item at Location C is 199, once you input 123 in the

Lot field of the Check-In screen, only Locations A and B will be displayed in the Location drop list.

The default check-in location can be replaced by selecting the location of choice from the drop down list.

<More> can be selected from the drop down list to select any location entering into the system. This will cause the item to be Moved automatically to the selected location immediately after the check-in.

Continuing with the example above, if the item came from Location A but you want to check it into

Location F, click <More> and select Location F. When the transaction is processed, the item will be checked-in to Location A and then moved to Location F automatically.

The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

6. Once you have entered the required information on the Check-In screen, click the Check-In button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List. All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled. You can either select another item for Check-In or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction(s).

The Check-In button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Check-In is posted to the Pending

Transaction List.

150

InventoryControl Printable Help

At any time, you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error using the Remove and Remove All buttons.

151

InventoryControl Printable Help

9.6 Checking Out Inventory

The Check-Out screen allows you to check-out, or assign, inventory to customers for a specified length of time. Checking out inventory decreases the quantity of that item that you have on-hand, but does not remove the inventory from your database (since it is assumed the inventory will be checked back in). The check-out function is useful if you lease equipment to customers or have a need to temporarily loan-out inventory.

Note for WaspNest Users: This feature is not available for WaspNest Users. For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help >

Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

You can only check-out inventory that has been added. This means that when you create an item, you must add inventory (quantity) to it before you can check out that item to a customer. Remember that inventory is the amount or quantity of an item. You can add inventory to an item either on the Add

Inventory screen or by Receiving inventory.

Checking Out Inventory:

the screen.

2. On the Inventory menu, click the Check-Out icon. The Check-Out screen appears.

2. Highlight the item for which you want to check-in inventory, then click the Check-Out icon. The

Check-Out screen appears.

152

InventoryControl Printable Help

Add button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the

Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

3. Complete the Customer field: To Check-Out Inventory, first enter a customer in the Customer field. To input a Customer, you can type or scan the value into the field, you can use the drop down list to select an existing customer from the Customer List or select <New> from the drop down list to access the Create New Customer screen. This will populate the Customer field as well as the Name, Address and Phone fields.

Note: If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen, the Create Customer screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Customer is entered. If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Customer is entered, a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen. For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic

New option, please refer to the

Options

Accessing the Create New Items Screen

4. Complete the Item fields: Next, select the Item Number for the inventory the customer wants to check-out. To input an Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop list to select an existing Item from the Item List.

Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields:

153

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Location - filtered by Site.

 Quantity - unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number - Set on the Add or

Edit Item screens, which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1.

 Any of the associated Tracked By fields: Serial Number, Date Code, Lot or

Pallet (Set on the Add or Edit Item screens). A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created.

Below is an example of this screen with the fields enabled:

The Maximum value shows the greatest quantity of this Item that can be Checked-Out.

5. Complete the Track By fields: As mentioned above, the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter. If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item, these fields will be disabled. Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the

Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen.

Since you can only check-out existing quantity, if the Tracked By item you are checking out is not in the list, make sure you have the right Item Number and Location. The Tracked By fields will only show values that are possible for the selected Item Number and Location. (If an item with a given Serial Number is not in the list, it may be Checked-Out, and thus, not removable.) If you still do not see the Tracked By information you expect, you should make sure the selected Item

Number at the selected Location exists and has quantity. Also check that you are using the right Site.

154

InventoryControl Printable Help

6. Complete the Due Date fields: If you choose the default Return Date, it is calculated by adding the number of days specified in the item's Checkout Length field to today's date. The Checkout

Length is set on the Create New Item screen and edited on the Edit Item screen. You can override the default return date by selecting the Custom or None button. Custom allows you to specify a return date by entering it in the Custom Date field. None allows a customer to checkout inventory for an indefinite period of time.

The Notes screen allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

7. After you have entered the inventory information on the Check-Out screen, click the Check-Out button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List. All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Customer and Item Number fields will be disabled. You can either select another item to be added to the Pending Transaction List or you can click Commit to submit the transaction(s).

The Check-Out button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one transaction is posted to the Pending Transaction List.

At any time, you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error. submitting the transactions.

155

InventoryControl Printable Help

9.7 Adjusting Inventory Amounts

The Adjust Inventory screen allows you to modify the quantity (inventory amount) of existing items.

Adjust is like a "mini" Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO (First In First Out) to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here. The Adjust function is useful if too much or too little quantity is accidentally entered for an item (on a mobile device, for example), inventory is lost, found, broken, etc. and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item. Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the

Audit function makes other functions of the software, such as adding inventory, unavailable to ensure inventory is not added or removed while you are doing the counts. All features are still available when adjusting inventory.

Note: An item tracked by Serial Number which has been Checked-Out cannot be Adjusted.

This topic covers:

Adjusting Inventory

Duplicate Serial Numbers Warning

9.7.1 Adjusting Inventory:

the screen.

156

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location, for example. ushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. (The

Add, Adjust, etc. button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these transactions to the Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

3. Complete the Item fields: To input an Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the Item List.

You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field.

Entering an item number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description and enables the following fields:

 Location - filtered by Site.

 Quantity

 Any of the associated Track By fields: Any of the associated Track By fields: Serial

Number, Date Code, Lot or Pallet. A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the

Item is created.

157

Below is an example of the screen with the fields enabled:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Selecting a Reason from the drop down list allows you to track why this adjustment is being made.

The Reason also determines if the quantity is positive or negative for By Difference adjusts.

When to select the By Counts or By Difference check boxes:

By Count indicates that the Quantity you are entering is the total count of that item at the specified Location. For instance, if the software shows that you have 3 of Item A at Location 1, but you have counted 5, you should enter 5.

By Difference indicates that the Quantity you are entering is the change you want to see in the

Quantity for that Item at that Location. For instance, if you just damaged 2 of Item A at Location 1, you can enter 2, set the Reason to Breakage (-), and the total will be adjusted downward by 2.

4. Complete the Track By fields: The Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter. If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item, these fields will be disabled. Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen.

When an item is tracked by Serial Number, 0 and 1 are the only valid values for Quantity.

158

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. Enter the Quantity: After you have specified the Item, Location and Track Bys, you should input the total Quantity you are adding to the item.

6. Enter the Transaction Code: This field allows you to type a new or select a previously committed code that describes the transaction. Transaction Codes can be any code your business assigns to certain types of adjustment transactions. Assigning these codes can help you with reporting as each type of adjustment can (breakage, return, etc.) can be given it's own code. This software does not contain any preset codes. This gives you the opportunity to assign a code that best suits your needs, and allows for the entry of codes you already use in your business for these types of transactions.

7. Enter Notes (Optional): The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction. screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled. You can either select another item to Adjust or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction(s).

The Adjust button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one transaction is posted to the

Pending Transaction List.

At any time, you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error using the Remove or Remove All buttons.

9. If you want to print a receipt of this transaction, enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt

on Commit - Copies field.

159

InventoryControl Printable Help

10. Click Commit to submit the transaction(s) to your database.

9.7.2 Duplicate Serial Numbers Warning:

If you are tracking the item by Serial Number and the system detects an item with the same serial number in a location other than the one you selected on the Adjust screen, when you click the Adjust button you will receive a warning message that states:

"You are trying to adjust an item that is tracked by serial number. We have found that serial number at a

different location. Do you want to adjust the item at that location to 0 so you can movie it to this location?"

Select Yes on this message to adjust the quantity of the item to 0 at the location detected by the software.

The quantity adjustment will be made in the location detected by the software and the item will automatically be moved to the location you selected on the Adjust screen. The transaction will appear on the Pending Transaction List.

Select No if you think you have selected the incorrect location. The Adjust transaction will not appear on the Pending Transaction List and you will be able to correct the location on the Adjust screen.

160

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 10 - Kit Items

10.1 Kitting Overview

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Kit items are a group of items that are sold together, but are still considered separate inventory items.

As opposed to Assembly Items, you cannot add inventory, move or check out/in Kit Items. While

Assembly Items can be created in advance (pre-assembled) and kept in inventory, Kit Items are created at pick or remove time.

Kit Items vs Assembly Items

Kit Items are a collection of items that are sold together, but are listed separately in the transaction

Kit Item Example:

Here is an example of the workflow for creating a Kit Item:

John's Computer Store sells custom configured computers. While he keeps all components (monitors, keyboards, CPUs, Printers etc.) in stock, he tracks each of these as separate items. When a customer buys a computer, he or she designates which monitor is needed, which printer, etc. John then creates a

Kit Item in InventoryControl made up of the selected components. The Kit Item goes onto his Inventory

List with zero quantity and stays that way until he Removes it, which would be the time of customer pick up or shipping. At the time of Removal, the quantity for each component item is reduced and the Kit

Item is completely removed from the Item List.

Kit Items should not be confused with Pick Orders. Pick Orders can contain many unrelated items, Kit

Items are a group of items that make up a new item (as in the Computer Store example). Kit Items can be included on Pick Orders.

Flow of Kit Items:

1. Create the Kit Item: Use the Create New Item screen to create your kit item. When you access the Create New Item screen for Kit items, there will be a tab labeled Kitting Information. Use this tab to designate which items you want included in this Kit Item. Keep in mind that inventory amounts for the component items are not changed when you create the Kit Item. The Kit Item is added to your Item List.

161

InventoryControl Printable Help

2. Remove the Kit Item: After the Kit Item has been picked and sold, use the Remove function to remove the designated quantity from inventory. At this time, inventory amounts for the component parts will be reduced.

Detailed instructions on how to create Kit Items and Remove them are provided in the following topics:

Creating Kit Item

Removing Kit Items

162

InventoryControl Printable Help

10.2 Creating a Kit Item

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Kit Items are used when you want to combine two or more existing items in order for them to be sold together. Kit items are not kept or tracked in inventory (you cannot add, move, check out, etc.). We recommend you read the

Kitting Overview

topic before you begin creating Kit Items.

Note: You can import the general information for a Kit Item, but not the compositional information (i.e. which items make up the component items). If you import Kit Items, you must then finish setting them up manually on the Edit Item screen.

This topic discusses:

General Information Tab

Kit Information Tab

Additional Information Tab

Custom Texts/Custom Numbers and Dates Tab

Saving the New Item

10.2.1 Accessing the Create New Items Screen:

The Create New Item screen appears:

163

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note that in addition to the usual tabs that appear on the Create New Item screen, there is also a tab labeled Kit Information.

10.2.2 General Information Tab:

The General Information tab is where you will enter the basic information about the item. Please see the screen shot above for an example of this tab.

Input the appropriate information in the fields provided:

Field Description

The Item Number is often available on a barcode label already attached to the item, such as a UPC code or SKU number. Using an existing barcode for the

Item Number allows you to scan or manually enter the number from each item as

Item Number

it comes in without having to print and affix your own barcode inventory item

(Required)

labels. Item numbers in InventoryControl cannot exceed 31 characters.

Do not use a description as the item number. You should enter a numeric value in the Item Number field. A description of the item can be entered in the

164

InventoryControl Printable Help

Category

Description field.

For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs, see

topic.

A Category is an optional classification you can give to your items. This provides you with another way to group your items. For example, you could create a

Category called laptops and assign that category to any laptop items you have.

You can create new Categories by typing in the desired name in the Category field. You will receive a message asking if you want to save the new Category.

Select Yes to save. Categories you have already created will appear in a drop down list.

Checkout

Length

Check Out is not allowed for Kit items.

This is the entity that manufactured the item. This field is optional and provides

Manufacturer

another way to sort and group your items. When a new Manufacturer is typed into the Manufacturer field, you will receive a message asking if you want to save the value as a new Manufacturer.

Type (Pro and

When you access the Create New Item screen by selecting New > Item > Kit,

Enterprise

this field will automatically be set to Kit. If you accessed it any other way, you

Versions

can select Kit from the Type drop down.

Only)

Tracking it not available for Kit items. Component items can be tracked.

Item to be

Tracked By

Cost

Cost specifies the amount your company paid to get this item into inventory. This is an optional tool to help you track your average cost. Cost handling in

Feet or Inches, in our example).

Keep in mind that you can enter a new cost on the Add Inventory screen if you purchase this item at a discount.

Cost Method Cost Method does not apply to Kit items.

165

InventoryControl Printable Help

This is a calculated value that averages the cost paid for the current Quantity.

This will be blank when you are entering a new item, but will appear when you are viewing the Edit Item screen for an item that has inventory (quantity).

If you have 20 quantity of this item at cost 10.00 and add another 30 quantity at cost 8.00,

Average Cost = ((20 x 10.00) + (30 x 8.00)) / 50 = 8.80

Average Cost

Removes are calculated using the inventory calculation method you specified.

For example, if you are using the FIFO method, if you later remove 5, 5 of the

$10.00 items will be removed first,

Average Cost = ((15 x 10.00) + (30 x 8.00)) / 45 = 8.67

List Price

Sale Price

When calculating Average Cost, the software does not include records that have an average cost of zero. When you run an Inventory Cost Report, the software

does include zero cost quantities when calculating Total Cost.

This field specifies a manufacturer's list price for an item. This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports.

This field specifies the price at which you sell an item. This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports.

Min Stock

Level

Max Stock

Level

Not available for Kit items.

Reorder Qty Not available for Kit items.

Total

Shippable

The total on hand amount minus committed quantities for all component items.

(Committed is inventory that is contained on a pick order.)

10.2.2 Kit Information Tab:

This tab is where you will indicate which items you want included in this Kit.

166

InventoryControl Printable Help

To select items to include in your Kit Item: the Item Number field, select which item you want to add to this assembly. If you select Full

List, the Item List will be filtered by the Type you selected (i.e., if Non-Inventory is selected, only non-inventory items will appear on the Item List. If Assembly is selected, only Assembly items will appear in the List).

When you tab out of the Item Number field after selecting an item, the Description, Stocking

Unit and Total In-House fields will populate with the information for that item.

Note: The cost will be calculated and updated based on your selections on this tab unless you have checked the Do Not Override Cost on the General Tab checkbox located at the bottom of the Kit

Information tab.

167

InventoryControl Printable Help

10.2.3 Additional Information Tab:

When you have finished entering information on the Kit Information tab, click the Additional tab. The

Additional Information tab provides optional fields where other information about the Item can be recorded. An example of this tab is shown below:

Complete the fields on this tab as described below:

 Dimension Unit is the increment to be used for Length, Width and Height. (Examples: inch, foot, yard, millimeter, centimeter, meter, etc.)

 Length is the length of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Width is the width of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

168

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Height is the height of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units.

 Weight Unit is the increment to be used for mass. (Examples: ounce, pound, ton, milligram, gram, kilogram, metric ton, etc.)

 Weight is the mass of one Unit of Measure expressed in Weight Units.

 Add Notes allows you to record any additional information.

10.2.4 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab:

Using Custom

Fields

10.2.5 Saving the New Item:

When you have finished adding information, click the OK/Save button. The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen.

Close to exit the form. the the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry.

For more information about the Options screen, please refer to the

topic.

169

InventoryControl Printable Help

10.3 Removing Kit Items

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Remove screen allows you to remove a kit item from the database. This can be considered the same as shipping inventory. You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen.

The Remove function uses FIFO (First in First Out) to determine what inventory is removed first. If you

Removing Inventory from an Item:

the screen.

2. On the Item List, highlight an item in the grid, then click the Remove icon.

170

InventoryControl Printable Help

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields:

 Quantity (unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number - Set on the Add or

Edit Item screens, which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1).

 Location

 Any of the associated Tracked By fields: Track by fields are not used for Kit items, though the individual component items may have track bys.

 Customer

 Notes

You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field.

Create New screen. For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New option,

Options

For an example of the Pick Order List, please refer to the

4. Enter the Customer: Select a Customer from the drop down list. Select <New> from the

Customer drop list to open the Create New Customer screen.

The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

5. After you have completed entering the information, click the Remove button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List. All fields on the Remove screen will be cleared and all but the Item

Number field will be disabled. You can either select another item to be removed or you can click

Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction(s).

The Remove button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields. Click the Remove button to continue Removing the kit item. If no additional information

171

InventoryControl Printable Help

(such as serial numbers) is needed for any of the associated component items, you can click

Commit at this point to complete the remove process.

If additional information is needed for one or more items, this Remove screen appears.

This Remove screen displays all items tied to this Kit Item. Those items that appear checked as in the example above are ready to be removed.

Items that are not checked need additional information, usually a Track By or Location, if inventory is kept at more than one location. screen. The selected item's information will populate the screen.

7. Enter any missing information, usually a Track By such as Serial Number. When you are tracking by serial number, click on the Serial Number drop down to see a list of all unique serial numbers associated with the selected item. You can also scan this information.

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. This is helpful when you have to enter multiple serial numbers, for example. Pushpins

172

InventoryControl Printable Help

can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field. This feature is especially useful when scanning serial numbers.

Clicking the button will unlock the field. another item for removal, if needed.

9. If you want to print a receipt of this transaction, enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on

Commit - Copies field.

10. Click Commit to submit the transaction(s) to your database.

173

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 11 - Pick Orders

11.1 Pick Order Overview

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Pick Orders are orders that you create when inventory is requested by a customer and needs to be taken

(picked) from your warehouse, store, storage facility, etc. and shipped to the customer. InventoryControl allows you to create a pick order that can then be automatically emailed to the warehouse and/or printed for reference.

The basic flow of pick orders is as follows:

1. Your business receives a request for inventory (through an invoice, a sales slip, etc.).

2. A pick order for the requested merchandise is entered on the Create New Pick Order screen.

You can enter any item in any quantity on this screen. Actual on-hand amounts are not checked at this point. You can choose to email the order and/or print the order. These two actions occur when you click the Save button.

A newly created Pick Order has a status of New. The status remains New until pick quantities are entered on the Picking Order screen. If the order becomes overdue before it begins to be picked, the status changes to New - Overdue.

For detailed information creating pick orders, please see the

Creating a Pick Order

topic.

Order List you can Edit or Delete (as long as the order is not in process) the order as needed.

Pick Order List Example

topic. For

detailed information on using the list screen, please refer to the

For detailed information on picking orders on the PC, please refer to

topic.

4. When the order is actually being picked, that is, the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer, the picked quantities for each item on the order are entered in the Picking Order screen (Receive/Pick menu > Pick). This can be done on the PC or on the mobile devices. At this time, the quantities are checked and you cannot pick more than you actually have in inventory.

Picking Orders

. For

detailed information on picking orders on a Windows Mobile Device, please refer to

Windows

Mobile Device - Picking Items for Orders

. For detailed information on picking orders on the

WDT2200, please refer to

WDT2200 - Picking Inventory for Orders

Pick orders that have some items picked have a status of In Process. If the order becomes overdue, it will have a status of In Process - Overdue.

For detailed information on the Picking Order screen, please refer to the

Picking Orders

topic.

174

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. After the order is fully picked it has a status of Completed. You can have InventoryControl automatically email the packing slip to the customer.

11.2 Creating a Pick Order

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Pick orders are created to designate certain inventory to be shipped to a customer. On the Create New

Pick Order screen, you are creating an order that tells your staff to get the order ready and what inventory to include. These orders can be sent to the mobile devices (although pick orders cannot be created on mobile devices). After the order has been picked, you need to mark it as ready to be shipped on the Pick Order screen accessed from the Receive/Pick menu. At this point, the inventory is removed from the system. For more information on the Pick Order screen, please refer to the Shipping Pick

Orders topic.

We recommend you review the

Pick/Ship Overview

before creating pick orders for the first time.

Creating New Pick Orders:

From the Main screen, click Lists > Pick Order. On the Pick Order List, click the New icon.

The Create New Pick Order screen appears.

175

InventoryControl Printable Help

Notice that the screen prominently displays the status as New. This status message changes based on the state the order is in.

Possible statuses are:

 New - This always displays when creating a new order.

 Issued - Once the pick order is printed or emailed, the status changes to Issued.

 In Process - Once the order has started to be picked (via the Pick Order screen accessed from the Receive/Pick menu), the status becomes In Process and the Picked

Quantity will display for each item on the order.

 Overdue - This status can appear for New or In Process orders that have passed the designated due date. These orders will appear with a symbol on the Pick Order List to alert you of their overdue status.

 Closed - This status means the order has been completed and marked as closed.

Note: To prevent fields from clearing, click the pushpin button located to the right of the field you want to lock. Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field.

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

176

InventoryControl Printable Help

alpha-numeric value up to 36 characters. This number can be manually entered each time you create a new pick order or you can create a template that the software will use to automatically generate a number for you. If you have set up a template, click the Generate button to have

InventoryControl create and assign an order number. The template can contain any combination of custom text, dates and/or counters enabling you to create a unique identifier that is meaningful to your company. For more information on setting up automatically generated Order Numbers, please refer to the

Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers

topic.

2. Enter a Customer in the Customer field. You can scan a value into this field, manually enter a value or click on the field to view a drop down list. The list contains the last 10 Customers selected on this screen. Select <MORE> to view the entire Customer List or click <New> to go to the Create Customer Supplier screen to add a new customer to the database.

When a customer is selected, the Customer Address information automatically populates. If the selected customer has more than one address entered for it, you can select the Address Type from the drop down list. clicking the down arrow and selecting a new date. select a date.

6. Select the preferred shipping method for this order in the Ship Via field from the drop down list.

This list contains several commonly used shipping methods, however; you can type in a new shipping method if desired. The new entry will appear in the drop down list for future purchase orders.

Note: If you need to delete a Ship Method you have entered, you can do so on the Manage

Ship Methods screen. This screen also allows you to Print, Export and Add New methods. For more information on the Manage Ship Methods screen, please refer to the

Managing Shipping

Methods

topic.

7. Enter any notes you want to associate with this order in the Notes field.

8. Now you are ready to enter your item information in the Line Item Details section. Complete this information as follows:

 Type - Select the type of item that needs to be picked. Options are: o

Inventory - This item is in your inventory database. Use this to pick existing items. o

Non-Inventory - This item is not in your inventory database. Use this to pick items that you do not want to appear in your inventory database, such as marketing fliers or business cards. o

Assembly - Assembly Items are a collection of items that, once grouped, are considered to be a new, single item. Assembly Items are pre-assembled and kept in stock. o

Kit - Kit items are a collection of items that are grouped, or picked, at the time they are sold.

177

InventoryControl Printable Help

Manual - Use this option to add one-time items, such as shipping and handling, to an order. Manual items cannot be picked on the mobile devices.

 Item Number - Enter the Item Number of the item you want to add to the order. To enter an Item Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database, select <more> on the drop down list to see all items in the Item List.

You can create a new item by selecting <New> or by entering an unknown item number.

When either of these two situations occur, the Create New Item screen appears. For

more information on creating items, please refer to the

Creating New Items

For detailed information on this function, please refer to the

When you enter an Item Number the Description field populates.

 Request Qty - Enter the requested number of this item. This value can also be scanned. You cannot enter negative numbers. You can enter any item held in your inventory in any amount on this screen. Actual on-hand amounts are not checked at this point so you are not limited to creating pick orders for the quantity of items in your inventory.

 Stocking Unit - This field displays the stocking unit entered for this item on the New

Item/Edit Item screen. The stocking unit represents how you stock this item in your inventory. For instance, if you stock the unit in boxes of 10. Box of 10 would display changed on this screen. If you need to change the description, you can do so on the

Edit Item screen.

9. After you have entered all items for this order, you can optionally select to: in the Stocking Unit field on this screen. For more information on creating items, please refer to the

Creating New Items

topic.

 Description - This field populates after the item number is entered and cannot be

 Print on Save - If this box is checked, a copy of this order automatically prints when you click the Save button.

 Email on Save - If this box is checked, a copy of this order is automatically sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen for this customer when you click the

Save button. If you have selected to view the Email Destination List (selected on the Options screen), the list will appear allowing you to select email addresses or change email addresses as needed. If you have selected not to view the list, the order will automatically be sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen

from the email address listed in the Company Information screen. Please note that if the email addresses are not entered on the Customer or Company Information screens, you will receive an error message when you try to send emails.

An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen. You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC

Addresses field on the Email Destination List.

Below is an example of the Email Destination List:

178

InventoryControl Printable Help

In order for the email feature to work correctly, you must set your SMTP Server,

User Name and Password (if authentication is required for outgoing mail) and the

SMTP Port on the Options screen. If these are not set, an error message will appear.

For more information on setting these email options on the Options screen, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic. For more information on the Email Distribution

List, please see the

Email Distribution List

topic.

10. Click Save to save this order to the database. A newly created pick order has a status of

New. The status remains New until pick quantities are entered on the

Pick

screen. If the order becomes overdue before it begins to be picked, the status changes to New- Overdue.

11.3 Editing Pick Orders

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

For more information on using the List screens, see the

Working with Lists

topic.

The Edit Purchase Order screen is identical to the New Purchase Order screen, except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen. You can change any of this information. For information on using each tab of the screen, please refer to the

Creating a Pick Order

topic.

179

InventoryControl Printable Help

11.4 Pick Order List Example

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Working with Lists

topic.

180

InventoryControl Printable Help

11.5 Picking Orders

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

When a pick order is actually being picked, meaning the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer, the quantities that are removed from inventory for each item on the order are entered in the

Pick screen. At this time, the quantities are checked and you cannot pick more than you actually have in inventory unless the Over Pick option is enabled on the

Options

screen.

Picking Orders:

bottom of the screen.

3. Select which pick order you will be working on from the Order Number drop down list. The most recently selected orders will appear in the list or select <More> to view the Pick Order List.

When you select an Order Number, the information for the selected picking order populates the screen:

181

InventoryControl Printable Help

4. Enter the date these items are to be shipped in the Ship Date field.

5. You can optionally type in notes for this order in the Notes screen.

6. How you can mark the items as picked. Select the checkbox next to the item you are picking:

The Quantity field becomes enabled allowing you to enter the quantity you picked.

You must mark these items as picked from one or more locations by clicking the plus sign in front of the listing:

A box appears allowing you to select a Location and a Quantity for that location. The Available

Qty is also shown so you can easily see how many of this item are available at this location.

7. You can select options to be performed upon clicking Save from the On Save section. Options are:

 Print Packing Slip. Copies - Prints the packing slip containing all items picked for this order. Enter the number of copies of this packing slip you want to print in the field provided.

You can open a pick order and print one or more copies of the packing slip regardless of what state the pick order is in (new, issued). To do this, enter the number of copies you want to print, then click OK. All items picked for this order will be included on the packing slip, regardless of the setting of the Packing Slip for Session option (see Note, below,

182

InventoryControl Printable Help

for more information on the Packing Slip for Session option).

 Email Packing Slip - Sends an email containing this packing slip to the selected addresses. If you have selected to view the Email Destination List (selected on the

Options screen), the list will appear allowing you to select email address or change email addresses as needed. If you have selected not to view the list, the packing slip will automatically be sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen from the email address listed in the Company Information screen. Please note that if the email addresses are not entered on the Customer or Company Information screens, you will receive an error message when you try to send emails.

An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen. You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses field on the Email Destination List.

In order for the email feature to work correctly, you must set your SMTP Server, User

Name and Password (if authentication is required for outgoing mail) and the SMTP Port on the Options screen. If these are not set, an error message will appear.

For more information on the Options screen, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

 Close this Pick Order - Marks this order as closed. Select this option after all items for the order have been picked.

Note on the Packing Slip for Session Option:

By default, the packing slip that can be printed and/or emailed upon saving displays only items picked in the current pick session. If you want to pick multiple times and print a packing slip that displays all the picks for this pick order, including items picked previously, you can select to do so on the Options screen.

For example:

Assume Pick Order 001 a quantity of 5 for item ABC and a quantity of 4 for item XYZ.

Today I pick 2 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them. The packing slip will display 2

ABC and 2 XYZ. Tomorrow I pick the other 3 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them.

The packing slip has 3 ABC and 2 XYZ.

This would also be exactly the same if both picks and ships were done on the same day.

If, however, I pick what I have in the morning and don’t ship it and a shipment comes in that day or the next and I complete the order before shipping anything, I will want all of the items picked throughout the day to display on one packing slip. To do this the option must be set on the Options screen to accumulate all of the picks on the pick slip. For more information on this option, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

After entering the pick quantities, click Save to update the amounts on the screen. Inventory is removed for those items you marked as picked. Click Close to close the screen.

Quick/Scan Entry:

183

InventoryControl Printable Help

This feature opens a screen that allows you to quickly type in or scan in information. When you click the

Quick/Scan Entry button, a screen similar to the one shown below appears:

You can scan the barcode label on the item and the fields on the Quick/Scan Entry screen will populate with the scanned information. Click the Pick button, then scan the next item and the screen clears and repopulates with the new information. This is an easy method for quickly marking items as picked.

184

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 12 - Purchase Orders/Receiving

12.1 Purchase Orders/Receiving Overview

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Purchase orders can be created in InventoryControl when you need to order additional inventory from suppliers. These orders can be emailed to the supplier and/or printed upon creation and can be easily referenced and searched in the system. When you receive shipment of the items on the purchase order, the items can be marked as received either on the PC's Receive screen or on the mobile devices.

InventoryControl allows you to create purchase orders for:

 Inventory Items - This item is already in your inventory database. Use this to re-order existing items.

 Assembly Items - Assembly items are created when you combine two or more existing items or multiple quantity of one item to create a new item.

 Non-Inventory Items - This item is not listed as inventory in your database. Use this to order items for which you do not want to track inventory, such as marketing fliers or business cards.

 Manually Entered Items - Use this option to add one-time items, such as shipping and handling, to an order. Be aware that manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices.

With a little advanced planning much of the purchase order creation process can be automated for you. Setting up these four pieces before you begin creating purchase orders will speed the process:

 Set up preferred suppliers for your items (Pro and Enterprise versions only), then you can simply enter the item number on the purchase order and the supplier information will automatically appear on the order.

 Enter a supplier or suppliers for an item and enter that supplier's shipping unit of measures, this information will also automatically appear. Preferred suppliers are entered on the

Create New or

Edit Item screen, Manage Suppliers

tab. Supplier unit of measure information is entered on the

Create New or Edit Supplier

screen.

 Create a template for your purchase order numbers so that they will be automatically generated for each purchase order you create. These templates are set up on the

Formatting PO and Pick

Order Numbers

screen.

 Make sure you enter a minimum stock level for your items and enable the Automatic

Notification option. This enables InventoryControl to notify you of items that have reached their reorder point in a report broken down by location. Minimum stock levels are entered on the

Create New or Edit Item screen, General tab

. The Automatic Notification option is enabled on the

Options

screen.

 Enter email addresses for your suppliers. If email addresses are entered, you can select the

Email on Save option at the bottom of the Create New Purchase Order screen to automatically send notification emails to the supplier attached the current PO. In addition, you can enable

InventoryControl to send notification emails to PO managers, receiving, or anyone for whom you

185

InventoryControl Printable Help

have entered an email address. You can enter email addresses for your suppliers on the

Create

New or Edit Supplier

screen.

To further streamline the process, you can use a barcode scanner to add information to the scannable fields on the Create New Purchase Order screen, including Supplier, Purchase Order Number and

Item Number.

The basic flow from purchase order creation to receiving the items is as follows:

1. When you need to replenish inventory for an item or items, create a purchase order on the Create

New Purchase Order screen (accessed from

New > Purchase

Order). After you select a Supplier for this purchase order, you can click the

Items at Re-Order

Point button at the bottom of the screen.

The system will then check for any items for this supplier that are at or below their reorder points and populate the purchase order with those items.

A newly created

Purchase Order has a status of New. The status remains New until item quantities are entered on the

Receive screen. If the order becomes overdue before you receive it, the status changes to New -

Overdue.

For detailed information creating purchase orders, please see the

Creating a Purchase

Order

topic.

186

InventoryControl Printable Help

2. When you begin to receive inventory for the purchase order, you will enter the quantity received for each item on the Receive screen (Receive/Pick menu > Receive). Inventory for an item can be marked as received on the PC's Receive screen or on the mobile devices. This screen allows you to enter quantities received by location, and can optionally show you costing information as well. Receiving inventory on the Receive screen adds inventory to that item.

Purchase orders that have some items received have a status of In Process. If the order becomes overdue, it will have a status of In Process - Overdue.

For detailed information on the Receive screen, please refer to the

Receiving Inventory

topic.

For detailed information on receiving inventory on the WDT2200, please refer to

WDT2200 -

Receiving Inventory

. For detailed information on receiving inventory on a Windows Mobile

Device, please refer to

Windows Mobile Device - Receiving Inventory

3. After the order is fully picked it has a status of Completed.

The Purchase Order now appears on your

Purchase Order List

(Lists > Purchase

Orders). From the

Purchase Order List you can Edit or Delete

(as long as the order has not been partially received) the order as needed.

For an example of the

Purchase Order List, please refer to the

Purchase Order List

Example

topic. For detailed information on using the list screen, please refer to the

Working with Lists

topic.

187

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.2 Creating a New Purchase Order

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Purchase orders can be created in InventoryControl and emailed directly to your supplier, or printed for faxing or mailing. We recommend you review the topic

Purchase Orders/ Receiving Overview

before using the purchase order feature for the first time.

Creating New Purchase Orders:

From the Main screen, select Lists > Purchase Order. On the Purchase Order List, click the

New icon.

The Create New Purchase Order screen appears.

Notice that the screen prominently displays the status as New. This status message changes based on the stage the purchase order is in.

188

InventoryControl Printable Help

Possible statuses are:

 New - This always displays when creating a new order.

 Issued - Once the purchase order is printed or emailed, the status changes to Issued.

 In Process - Once the order has started to be received (via the Receive screen accessed from the Receive/Pick menu), the status becomes In Process and the

Received Quantity will display for each item on the order.

 Overdue - This status can appear for New or In Process orders that have passed the designated due date. This orders will appear with a symbol on the Purchase Order List to alert you of their overdue status.

 Closed - This status means the order has been completed and marked as closed.

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

2. Enter a supplier in the Supplier field. You can scan a value into this field, manually enter a value or click on the field to view a drop down list. The list contains the last 10 Suppliers selected on this screen. Select <More> to view the entire Supplier List or click <New> to go to the Create

New Supplier screen to add a new supplier to the database.

When a supplier is selected, the Supplier Address information automatically populates. If the selected supplier has more than one address, you can select the Address Type from the drop down list.

After you enter the Supplier information, you can click the Items at Minimum Stock Level button at the bottom of the screen. The system will then check for any items for this supplier that are at or below their minimum stock levels and populate the purchase order with those items. consisting of an alpha-numeric value up to 36 characters. This number can be manually entered each time you create a new purchase order or you can create a template that the software will use to automatically generate a number for you. If you have set up a template, click the

Generate button to have InventoryControl create and assign a PO number. The template can contain any combination of custom text, dates and/or counters enabling you to create a unique identifier that is meaningful to your company. For more information on setting up automatically generated Purchase Order Numbers, please refer to the

Formatting PO and Pick Order

Numbers

topic.

You should set up your numbers to contain a date field, followed by a serialized (count field), at the very least.

Company Information screen will appear in the list, or you can select <New> to enter a new address. Selecting <New> opens the Company Information screen allowing you to enter a new address. For more information on the Company Information screen, please refer to the

189

InventoryControl Printable Help

Entering Company Information

topic. the field and selecting a new date. field and select a date.

8. Select the preferred Ship Method for this order from the drop down list. This list contains several commonly used shipping methods, however; you can type in a new shipping method if desired.

The new entry will appear in the drop down list for future purchase orders. shipping methods, however; you can type in a new shipping method if desired. The new entry will appear in the drop down list for future purchase orders.

Note: If you need to delete a Ship or Payment Method you have entered, you can do so on the

Manage Ship Methods or Manage Payment Methods screens. These screens also allow you to Print, Export and Add New methods. For more information on the Manage Ship Methods screen, please refer to the

Managing Shipping Methods

topic. For more information on the

Manage Payment Methods screen, please refer to the

Managing Payment Methods

topic.

10. Now you are ready to enter your item information in the Line Item Details section. Complete this information as follows:

 Type - Select the type of item you are ordering. Options are: o

Inventory - This item is already in your inventory database. Use this to re-order existing items. o

Non-Inventory - This item is not listed as inventory in your database. Use this to order items for which you do not want to track quantity, such as marketing fliers or business cards. o

Manual - Use this option to add one-time items, such as shipping and handling, to an order. Manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices.

 Item Number - Enter the Item Number of the item you want to order. To enter an Item

Number, you can type or scan the value into the field, or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database, select <more> on the drop down list to see all items in the Item List.

When you enter an Item Number, the Description field populates.

 Description - This field populates after the item number is entered. This field can only be edited if Manual was selected in the Type field. If you need to change the description, you can do so on the Edit Item screen.

 Vendor SKU - This field populates after the item number is entered if a SKU was entered on the Add/Edit Item screen for this vendor. This field can only be edited if Manual was selected in the Type field.

190

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Ordered QTY - Enter the quantity you are ordering of this item. This field defaults to 1.

You cannot enter negative values in this field.

 Order Unit - Select the Order Unit from the drop down field or select <New> to enter a new Unit. You may want to enter a new unit here that is not an "eaches" or Stocking Unit measurement. For example, if you want to order 1 box of an item and this item ships in boxes containing 15 units, the "eaches", or Stocking Unit measurement is 15, but for ordering purposes, you could create a new unit that is BOX containing 15 units. You would then order 1 box rather than 15 units to avoid confusion for the supplier.

You can setup multiple Order Unit types for each supplier on the Create New/Edit Item screen - Manage Suppliers tab. This allows you to enter units based on the suppliers method of shipping (whether the supplier ships in boxes of 15, pallets of 50, etc.) For instance, you could set up a Box and Pallet Order Unit on the Suppliers tab so that when you create a Purchase Order for that item to go to the supplier, you can quickly select whether you want a box or a pallet. For more information on the Add Item screen -

Manage Suppliers tab, please refer to the

Creating New Items

topic.

 Cost - The cost will populate based on the Order Unit selected. You can also type in a new cost here.

 Line Total - This field calculates based on the Quantity multiplied by the cost.

11. After you have entered all items for this order, you can optionally select to:

 Print on Save - If this box is checked, a copy of this order automatically prints when you click the Save button.

 Email on Save - If this box is checked, a copy of this order is automatically sent to the email address listed in the Supplier screen for this supplier when you click the Save button. If you have selected to view the Email Destination List (selected on the

Options screen), the list will appear allowing you to select email addresses or change email addresses as needed. If you have selected not to view the list, the order will automatically be sent to the email address listed in the Supplier screen from the email address listed in the Company Information screen. Please note that if the email addresses are not entered on the Supplier or Company Information screens, you will receive an error message when you try to send emails.

Below is an example of the Email Destination List:

An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen. You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses

191

InventoryControl Printable Help

field on the Email Destination List.

It is a good idea to send yourself or someone else internal to your company a copy of any orders you email to a supplier.

In order for the email feature to work correctly, you must set your SMTP Server, User

Name and Password (if authentication is required for outgoing mail) and the SMTP Port on the Options screen. If these are not set, an error message will appear.

For more information on setting these email options on the Options screen, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

 Items at Minimum Stock Level - To help you keep track of items that are in danger of becoming understocked, InventoryControl has an automatic notification system built in.

Click the Items at Minimum Stock Level to view a list of all items that are currently at their minimum stock levels and whose default supplier is the supplier selected for this purchase order.

To use this feature, make sure you turn on the Automatic Notification option via the

Options

screen, then enter a quantity in the Minimum Stock Level field on the Create

New or Edit Item screen, Location tab.

12. Click Save to save this purchase order to the database.

12.3 Editing Purchase Orders

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Working with Lists

topic.

Creating a Purchase

Order

topic.

192

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.4 Purchase Order List Example

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

Working with Lists

topic.

193

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.5 Receiving Inventory from Purchase Orders

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

When you begin receiving inventory on a purchase order you created in the system, you will mark that inventory as received on the Receive screen. This screen allows you to select which purchase order you are receiving on and to mark individual items on that purchase order as received into a specific location.

You can also optionally view costing information on this screen as well.

Receiving Inventory:

bottom of the screen. list. When you select a Purchase Order, the screen populates with the information from that order as shown below:

194

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: In the example above, the Show Costing Information option is enabled on the Options screen show costing information is displaying on the Receive screen. If this option was not enabled, the costing information would not appear on this screen. For more information on enabling the Show Costing Information option, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

4. Enter the date these items were received in the Date field. You can enter previous dates, but not future dates.

5. You can optionally type in a receipt number in the Receipt Number field. If you receive this order in more than one shipment, you can partially receive it and enter in each receipt number as you access the screen. Previously entered receipt numbers, if any, will appear in the Receipt

Number drop down list.

6. Now you can mark the items as received. Select the checkbox next to the item you are receiving:

The Quantity field becomes enabled allowing you to enter the quantity you received. In the example above, you would enter however many cartons of this item you received.

You must mark these items as received into one or more locations by clicking the plus sign in front of the listing:

195

InventoryControl Printable Help

A box appears allowing you to select a Location and a Quantity for that location. Please be aware that quantities entered here are broken into Eaches. For instance, in the example above,

18 cartons of Item 400003 were ordered. Assume there are 200 items per carton. When you enter 5 in the Location/Quantity field, you are telling the system that 5 items from a carton were received into this specific location, rather than 5 cartons being received. If you wanted to receive

5 cartons into this location, you would need to enter 1000 (5 x 200).

7. After you have entered quantity amounts for all items you are receiving, you can (optionally) select tasks from the On Save section. You can select to:

 Print Receipts: When this is selected, when you click Save all receipts entered for this

Receive screen will print. This means that if you received this order in two separate shipments, and entered two separate receipts in the Receipt Number field, both receipts will print.

 Print Labels: When this is selected, when you click Save, labels will print for the received items.

 Close This PO: When this is selected, when you click Save, the selected Purchase

Order will be marked as closed. You would want to use this when you have received all items from the purchase order.

 Create Backorder, if necessary: When this is selected, after you click Save, a backorder will be created for any items that have not been received on this Purchase

Order. When a backorder is created you will see the order on the Purchase Order List with the status of New and BO appended to the end of the order number. amount you entered as received. When you click Save, the on hand quantities for the items you just received will increase by the amounts you entered.

If you partially received the order, the order's status will change to In Process.

Tips

Quick/Scan Entry:

This feature opens a screen that allows you to quickly type in or scan in information. When you click the Quick/Scan Entry button, a screen similar to the one shown below appears:

196

InventoryControl Printable Help

You can scan the barcode label on the item and the fields on the Quick/Scan Entry screen will populate with the scanned information. Click the Receive button, then scan the next item and the screen clears and repopulates with the new information. This is an easy method for quickly marking items as picked.

197

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.6 Purchase Order FAQ

What is the difference between the Shipping Unit of Measure and the Stocking Unit of Measure?

The Stocking Unit, entered on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen, Additional tab, is the portion by which the quantity will be stored in your inventory. This unit represents "Eaches", meaning it represents how you want each item of this type to be measured. Examples are: bag, barrel, basket, block, bottle, box, carton, container, drum, gallon, jar, pack, package, pallet, section, tub, vial, etc.)

The Shipping Unit, entered on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen, Manage Suppliers tab, (Pro and Enterprise versions only) isthe unit used by the supplier when shipping this item. This may be box, pallet, etc. This is different from the "Eaches" Stocking Unit. For example, you may have entered "jar" for the stocking unit, but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars. In this example, when creating purchase orders, you would specify the Order Unit as "box" rather than "jar" (or you could end up with 100 boxes of jars rather than 100 jars).

I have the Standard version of InventoryControl. Can I set up preferred suppliers for my items?

Standard version users are limited to one supplier per item, so this is automatically your preferred supplier. Pro and Enterprise version users can enter multiple suppliers for each item and select one as their preferred supplier.

What is the difference between the Reorder Quantity field found on the Create New Item or Edit

Item screen, General tab and the Reorder Quantity field found on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen, Location tab?

The Reorder Quantity field on the General tab is the reorder quantity for the item throughout all sites and locations. The Reorder Quantity field on the Location tab is the reorder quantity for the item at a specific location (you can enter this quantity for each location that contains this item).

When you are creating purchase orders, you can click the Items at Re-Order Quantity button to see a list of items that have reached their minimum stock levels (by location) for the selected supplier. You can then select which items to add to the purchase order and they will be inserted into the current order. The quantity in the Reorder Quantity field on the Location tab will be used for the quantity requested on the purchase order.

198

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.7 Deleting Purchase Orders/Pick Orders

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

You can quickly delete a Purchase Order or Pick Order from the Purchase Order or Pick Order List. Only orders with a status of New can be deleted. Once the status changes to In Process, meaning the order is partially received or partially picked, the order can no longer be deleted (however, these can still be edited or closed).

Deleting Purchase Orders/Pick Orders:

which type of order you want to delete. The List screen appears. order cannot be deleted (has a status of In Process), a warning message will appear notifying you. If the order can be deleted, a confirmation message will appear.

199

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.8 Receive/Pick Menu

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

The Receive/Pick Menu groups functions for receiving inventory from purchase orders and shipping pick orders into one location. You can also manage your shipping methods and payment methods from this screen as well as customize automatically generated purchase order and pick order numbers.

Receiving can be done either through the PC or on the mobile devices and adds inventory to your database. Pick orders are orders to pick and ship inventory to a customer, thus removing the inventory from your database.

To Access the Receive/Pick Menu:

bottom of the screen.

2. Click on any of the Receive/Pick Menu icons to go to that function. Detailed descriptions of the options found on the Receive/Pick Menu are provided below:

 Receive - The Receive function allows you to receive inventory from a purchase order.

This adds inventory to an item in the same way you manually add inventory via the Add

Inventory screen (accessed from the Inventory menu or from the Item and Inventory lists). For detailed information on this screen, please refer to the

Receiving Inventory

200

InventoryControl Printable Help

topic.

 Pick - The Pick function allows you to designate pick orders for shipping or to close a pick order. Pick Orders list inventory that needs to be sent to a customer. Pick orders remove inventory from an item in the same way you manually remove inventory via the

Remove Inventory screen (accessed from the Inventory menu or from the Item and

Inventory lists.) For information creating a new pick order, please refer to the

Creating a Pick Order

topic. For information on shipping Pick Orders, please refer to the Picking

Orders topic. For an overview of Pick Orders, please refer to the

Pick Orders Overview

topic.

 Manage Ship Methods - This function access a screen that allows you to add, delete, export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system (via the Shipping

Method field on the Create New Purchase Order or Create New Pick Order screens).

Managing Shipping

Methods

 Manage Payment Methods - This function access a screen that allows you to add, delete, export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system (via the

Shipping Method field on the Create New Purchase Order screen). For detailed information on this function, please refer to the

Managing Payment Methods

topic.

 Customize Numbers - This feature allows you to customize the format of Purchase

Order Numbers and Pick Order Numbers that the software automatically generates when creating a new Purchase Order or Pick Order. For detailed information on this feature, please refer to the

Customizing Numbers

topic.

201

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.9 Managing Payment Methods

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

This function accesses a screen that allows you to delete, export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system via the Payment Method field on the Create New Purchase Order screen.

This topic discusses:

Adding Payment Methods

Deleting/Printing/Exporting Payment Methods

12.9.1 Adding Payment Methods:

Note: Payment Methods can also be added on the Create New Purchase Order screen by typing in a new method in the Payment Method field. bottom of the screen.

List appears displaying all payment methods entered into the system.

202

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. The last row on the grid is blank. Click in the row and type in the new payment method. another payment method.

12.9.2 Deleting/Printing/Exporting Payment Methods:

bottom of the screen.

List appears displaying all shipping methods entered into the system.

203

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Highlight the desired listing, then select the function you want to perform. Options are:

 Delete - This deletes the highlighted shipping method from the database. When you select this option, a confirmation message will appear. Select Yes on the confirmation message to delete the method. It will no longer appear in the Payment Methods drop down list.

 Print - Allows you to print the Payment Method List. When this option is selected, a standard Page Setup screen appears allowing you to enter margins. An example of this screen is shown below:

Click the OK button on the Page Setup screen to print the list. The list will print to your default printer.

 Export - Allows you to export the Payment Method List to an external text file. When the

Export option is selected, a screen appears allowing you to specify where the exported data will be saved on your computer. An example of the Export screen is shown below:

204

InventoryControl Printable Help

Make sure you save this to a location you can remember. You must also choose a name for your file on this screen. After you have made your selections, click Save to export your data.

A confirmation message will appear when your data has been successfully exported by the system.

205

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.10 Managing Shipping Methods

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

This function accesses a screen that allows you to delete, export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system via the Shipping Method field on the Create New Purchase Order or Create

New Pick Order screens. You can also add additional new shipping methods on this screen.

This topic discusses:

Adding Shipping Methods

Deleting/Printing/Exporting Shipping Methods

12.10.1 Adding Shipping Methods:

Note: Shipping Methods can also be added on the Create New Purchase Order and Create New Pick

Order screens by typing in a new method in the Shipping Method field. bottom of the screen. appears displaying all shipping methods entered into the system.

206

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. The last row on the grid is blank. Click in the row and type in the new shipping method.

12.10.2 Deleting/Printing/Exporting Ship Methods:

bottom of the screen. appears displaying all shipping methods entered into the system.

3. Highlight the desired listing, then select the function you want to perform. Options are:

207

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Print - Allows you to print the Ship Method List. When this option is selected, a standard

Page Setup screen appears allowing you to enter margins. An example of this screen is shown below:

Click the OK button on the Page Setup screen to print the list. The list will print to your default printer.

 Export - Allows you to export the Ship Method List to an external text file. When the

Export option is selected, a screen appears allowing you to specify where the exported data will be saved on your computer. An example of the Export screen is shown below:

208

InventoryControl Printable Help

Make sure you save this to a location you can remember. You must also choose a name for your file on this screen. After you have made your selections, click Save to export your data.

A confirmation message will appear when your data has been successfully exported by the system.

209

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.11 Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

To make creating Purchase Orders and Pick Orders easier, InventoryControl allows you to set up autogenerated numbers. This allows you to quickly create sequential numbers by clicking the Generate button on the Create New Purchase Order and Create New Pick Order screens.

InventoryControl allows you to enter custom text, dates and/or counters, in any combination, to create a unique identifier that is meaningful to your business. You should set up your numbers to contain a date field, followed by a serialized count field, at the very least.

Formatting Purchase Order and Pick Order Numbers:

bottom of the screen. customize Purchase Order Numbers (PO Number) or Pick Order Numbers (Order Number). customize. The screen for these two are identical so for this example, we are going to select PO

Numbers. The Define PO Number Format screen appears.

210

InventoryControl Printable Help

4. Select the type of value you are entering from the Type drop down list. Your options are:

 Text - This option enters text or numeric data into the number. If you select Text, a text field appears allowing you to enter the text you want to appear in the number.

 Date - This option inserts the date into the number. If you select Date, a format field appears allowing you to select how you want the date to appear (mm/dd/yy. etc.)

 Counter - This option inserts a sequential counter into the number. If you select

Counter, fields appear allowing you to select how many digits you want to appear in the counter and at what number the counter should start. In the example below, we entered

5 in the Digits field and 2 in the counter field. This means the counter will display up to 5 digits and begin counting at 2.

211

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. When you have chosen your Type and entered the required values, select Add. Your entries will appear in the grid at the top of the screen and an example of how your number will look appears in the screen at the bottom of the screen.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have entered all types of data you want to appear in your number.

Your selections will appear in the number in the order they are displayed in the grid.

You can change the order by highlighting a listing in the grid and clicking the Up or Down buttons.

You can delete an item in the grid by highlighting it and clicking the Delete button.

212

InventoryControl Printable Help

12.12 Email Distribution List

Pro and Enterprise Versions Only

Note: For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest

Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

If the Email on Save box is checked on the Create New Pick Order or Create New Purchase Order screen, a copy of this order is automatically sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen for this customer (for Pick Orders) or to the email address listed in the Supplier screen for this supplier (for

Purchase Orders) when you click the Save button. If you have selected to view the Email Destination

List (selected on the Options screen), the list will appear allowing you to select email addresses or change email addresses as needed. If you have selected not to view the list, the order will automatically be sent. An example of this screen is shown below:

To Addresses: The order is sent

the email address listed in the Customer or Supplier screen. If there is no email address listed on the Customer or Supplier screen, you will receive an error message when you try to send emails. You can add an address to the Customer or Supplier screen, and/or edit the address listing on these screens at any time. See

Creating New Suppliers

Creating New

Customers

for information on the Suppliers or Customers screen.

From Addresses: The order is sent

from

the email address listed in the Company Information screen.

If there is no email address listed on the Company Information screen (this should be your company email address), you will receive an error message when you try to send emails. You can add/edit your company email address at any time on the Company Information screen. See

Entering Company

Information

for more details on the Company Information screen.

CC Addresses: An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen. You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses field on the

Email Destination List.

In order for the email feature to work correctly, you must set your SMTP Server, User Name and

Password (if authentication is required for outgoing mail) and the SMTP Port on the Options screen. If these are not set, an error message will appear.

For more information on setting these email options on the Options screen, please refer to the

Options

Screen

topic. For more information on creating pick orders, please refer to the

Creating a Pick Order

topic. For more information on creating purchase orders, please refer to the

Creating a Purchase Order

topic.

213

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 13 - Creating/Editing/Printing Labels

13.1 Selecting a Label Printer

The Labels menu provides access to pre-built labels contained in the software or allows you to create new labels.

Printing, Editing, Creating, Browsing Labels:

1. Select a Label Printer: From the Main Screen, click Options > Select Label Printer. The

Select Label Printer screen appears.

2. All printers currently connected to this computer will appear. Highlight the printer you want to use, then click OK. You can now begin printing labels.

214

InventoryControl Printable Help

13.2 Using the Labels Menu

The software allows you to select from several pre-built labels that can be printed the list screens or edited from the Labels menu. You can also create your own unique labels from the Labels menu.

The following topics are covered in this section:

Editing Labels

Creating Custom Labels

Browsing to an Existing Label

13.2.1 Editing Labels:

1. To edit labels, from the Main screen, click Labels.

215

InventoryControl Printable Help

A list of available labels will appear. If you do not see all the label files shown here upon accessing the list, expand the menu by clicking the + in front of the Labels fields.

2. Click on the label you would like to edit. Wasp Labeler will open with the selected label displayed. You can make changes as needed. Please see the Wasp Labeler online help for detailed instructions on editing labels. To access the help, select Help > Contents from the

Wasp Labeler toolbar.

13.2.2 Creating Custom Labels:

1. To create custom labels, from the Main screen, click Labels. A list of available labels will appear.

2. Select Create New Label to open Wasp Labeler without opening an existing .LAB file.

216

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Create your label as desired. Please see the Wasp Labeler online help for detailed instructions on creating labels. To access the help, select Help > Contents from the Wasp Labeler toolbar.

Note: When saving new labels you have created with Wasp Labeler, they will be listed with the default names shown on the Labels List. The files will automatically save to the .LAB files in the \Labels folder under the folder where you installed InventoryControl. If you are unsure where this is, just use the

Windows Find (or Search) command to locate the folder containing the file InventoryControl.exe, then save your .LAB files in the .\Labels folder beneath it.

13.2.3 Browsing to an Existing Label:

You may have custom labels you have already created that you want to access. To do this:

1. To browse to an existing label file (.LAB file), from the Main screen, click Labels. A list of available labels will appear.

3. Navigate to the desired .LAB file and select it. The label will open in Wasp Labeler allowing you to edit or print it.

217

InventoryControl Printable Help

13.3 Printing Labels from the List Screens

InventoryControl allows you to print Location and Item labels directly from the List screens. The following

List screens have label printing functionality:

Location List - Print Location Labels

Item List - Print Item Labels

Note: You must select a label printer prior to printing tags from the List screens. To do this, see the topic

Selecting a Label Printer

To Print Labels:

1. With the desired List screen open (Location or Item), highlight the listing you want to print. You can select multiple listings by holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard while clicking on listings.

The following screen appears:

3. Enter the number of copies of the selected labels you want to print. If you want to view a preview of how your label will appear, check the Preview box.

218

InventoryControl Printable Help

219

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 14 - Reports

14.1 Report Selection

This software comes with many built-in reports to help you maintain your inventory.

Selecting a Report:

2. Highlight the desired report, then click the OK button, or double-click on the report name. The report opens in the Report Viewer. For more information on viewing reports, please refer to the

Report Viewer

topic.

Selecting <Browse To Other Reports> lets you select the .RPT file you want to open by browsing your drives.

220

InventoryControl Printable Help

14.2 Report Viewer

The Report Viewer presents reports in an interactive environment that permits keyword searches, printing and export to Adobe Acrobat® Reader™ (. pdf), Microsoft® Excel (. xls), Microsoft® Word (.doc) or Rich Text Format (. rtf) files.

The Report Viewer is accessed by selecting a report name from the

Report Selection

screen.

The Status Bar in this example reports the current page being viewed, the total number of pages and the current zoom factor.

The left panel shows the report tree that shows how the report is organized and allows you to chose specific nodes.

The ReportViewer Tool Bar provides the following functions:

Go to First Page takes you to the beginning of the report.

Go to Previous Page

Go to Next Page

Go to Last Page takes you to the end of the report.

Print Report launches the Print dialog.

221

InventoryControl Printable Help

Refresh updates the report with current data.

Export Report allows you to save the report as your choice of any of the following formats:

Adobe Acrobat® Reader™ (. pdf file)

Microsoft® Excel (. xls file)

Microsoft® Word (.doc file) or Rich Text Format (. rtf file)

Toggle Group Tree OFF/ON - When this is turned off, it will increase the width of the Report display by turning off the Group Tree area at the left of the ReportViewer screen. When it is on, it will restore the

Group Tree display at the left of the ReportViewer screen - the default display.

Zoom allows you to scale the Report display via a drop list of percentages:

Search allows you to find all occurrences of a specified keyword within the displayed Report:

222

InventoryControl Printable Help

Specify a keyword and click Find Next to find the next occurrence.

Filter allows you to create filters for the selected report using the Report Filter Setup dialog.

Once a filter has been applied, the filter criteria will be displayed to the right of the Filter tool in the toolbar.

Depending on the number of transactions in your database, the Report you have selected, and the performance of your PC, ReportViewer can remain blank for quite some time while it access the database and dynamically builds the Report for display.

223

InventoryControl Printable Help

224

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 15 - Administration

15.1 Administration Menu

The Administration Menu groups tasks such as creating/editing your company information,

Importing/Exporting functions and maintaining security settings into one place.

To Access the Administration Menu:

bottom of the screen.

2. Click on any of the Administration Menu icons to go to that function. Detailed descriptions of the options found on the Administration Menu are provided below:

 Company Info - The Company Information screen allows you to enter or update your company information such as address, phone and email. The Company Name you enter on this screen will be used as the "header" for InventoryControl and will appear on all reports and pre-defined labels. The information on the Company Information screen should be filled out first when you are initially setting up the software. For detailed information on this screen, please refer to the

Company Information Screen

topic.

225

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Security - The Security Privileges screen allows users set up as Administrators to add users to the system, set user privileges, assign users to specific sites, and delete users.

For detailed information on this screen, please refer to the

Security Privileges

Accessing the Security Privileges Screen

Note: This option is not available in WaspNest Inventory.

 Import/Export - Import/Export allows you to import data into the database from an file or export data to an external file. Importing data from an external text or .csv file is a quick way to setup your software. For detailed information on Importing, please refer to

Importing Into the Database

. For detailed information on Exporting, please refer to

Exporting to a Text File

 Backup/Restore - The Backup and Restore functions allow you to quickly backup your entire inventory database or restore the database as of the last backup. Backing up your database regular is critical to maintaining your business continuity in the event of a system failure. If you backup regularly, you can easily restore the database and minimize disruption to your business. For detailed information on these functions please refer to the

Backup Database

topic or the

Restore Database

topic.

Note: Backup and Restore is not available in the Enterprise version of InventoryControl.

226

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.2 Company Information Screen

The Company Information screen allows you to enter or update information about your business. The name entered in the Company Name field on this screen is used as the application header as well as the header for all reports and pre-defined labels. The information on this screen should be completed first when setting up your software.

This topic covers:

Entering Company Information

Entering Multiple Address Types

Deleting an Address Type

15.2.1 Entering Company Information:

bottom of the screen. appears.

227

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Type in the requested information. The Company Name field is mandatory; all other fields on this screen are optional.

15.2.2 Entering Multiple Address Types:

This software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address, Receiving Address and/or Shipping

Address for your company and to create new address types as well. You can enter an address for each site that might have inventory shipped to it from purchase orders. To enter multiple address, follow the steps below: you will be entering from the Address Type drop down menu, or type in a new address type. For example, you could enter Warehouse 1 in the Address Type field.

2. If you entered a new address type, a confirmation message will appear verifying that you want to add it to the database. Select Yes on this message to save the new address type. The new entry will now appear in the Address Type drop down menu on all screens on which you can enter multiple address types (Create/Edit Suppliers, Create/Edit Customers, Create/Edit

Manufacturers).

3. Enter the remainder of the address information, then click OK. You will be returned to the

Administration Menu. with the information you just entered.

5. Select a different address type of the Address Type drop down menu, or enter a new one. The address lines (Address 1 and 2, City, State, Postal Code and Country) will clear while all other company information will remain on the screen.

6. Enter the new address information, then click OK. Repeat these steps for each address type.

228

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.2.3 Deleting an Address Type:

You can delete one or more addresses for your company by following the steps below. The delete button is only enabled when you have selected one of the address types you entered. It is not enabled when one of the standard address types (Corporate, Receiving, etc.) is selected. from the Address Type drop down menu.

Note: You cannot delete addresses that are part of active Pick Orders.

229

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.3 Adding Users/Editing Security Privileges

The Security Privileges screen allows those users setup as Administrators in the system to add users, set privileges, and/or delete users.

Note for WaspNest Users: The Security Privileges feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory. For more information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

A user with Administration Privileges, called an Admin User can add new users and make changes to existing users' security options. We recommend that at least one Admin user in addition to the default

Admin user be added to the system soon after installation.

This topic covers:

Adding Users on the Security Privileges Screen

Editing User Profiles on the Security Privileges Screen

Making Users Inactive

Copying User Security Profiles

Security Privileges Definitions

Business Examples

15.3.1 Accessing the Security Privileges Screen:

1. To access the screen, from the Main screen, click the Administration icon. The Administration

Menu appears at the bottom of the screen. the

Note: The Receive, Pick, Build Assembly and Disassemble Privileges are only available to

Pro and Enterprise Version Users.

230

InventoryControl Printable Help

When you first access this screen, you will see a user listed as Admin, User (as shown in the screen shot above). This is the default Admin User and this user cannot be changed or deleted.

The Admin User profile allows you to access the system for the first time after installation and setup your system. The password for this user can be changed, if needed.

15.3.2 Adding Users to the Security Privileges Screen:

231

InventoryControl Printable Help

2. First Name, Last Name, a User Name (used when logging on to the system), a Password and

Status (which is normally set to Active) are required. You can optionally enter a Title,

Department, Manager and/or Email address. If you mark this employee as Inactive in the Status field, Inactive will appear next to his/her name in the User List. screen which will now display the new user's profile.

4. All privileges and sites are initially disabled when you enter a new user. This means the user will not be able to access anything in the system. You must select which features you want the user to be able to access by selecting the desired checkboxes in the Privileges screen. For example, in the screen shot below, the user Roger Dodger was given access to Add Inventory, Adjust

Inventory and Delete and to Site 200.

232

InventoryControl Printable Help

These selections can later be changed by any user who has Administration Privilege.

6. If you have more than one Site, you can limit this user's access to whichever sites you want. To do this, select the Sites to which you want this user to have access. Click Select All to quickly give the user access to all sites.

Click the "User can access all current and future sites" to automatically give this user access to any sites you may add in the future.

16.3.3 Editing User Profiles on the Security Privileges Screen:

You can now change the selections in the Privileges screen by selecting or de-selecting checkboxes. An existing user's information can be updated by any user with Administration

Privilege. In addition to the ability to change other values, this is where an Administration user can reset a Password for a user that has forgotten it.

2. If you want to change the user name or personal information, highlight the user name in the User

List and click Edit > Update User. The Update Existing User screen will appear populated with the selected user's information.

233

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Type in new data as needed, then click the OK button. You will be returned to the Security

Privileges screen.

security privileges the changes will not go into effect until the next time you log on.

Note: If you select Cancel, you will exit the screen without saving changes made to the

Privileges section on the currently selected user. Changes previously made to other users will be saved. A message will appear asking if you want to discard changes. Select Yes to close the screen without saving the changes, or No to save any changes.

The Admin,User is unique in that its user name and privileges cannot be changed. Only the password can be changed for the Admin user.

15.3.4 Making Users Inactive:

Admin Users can mark users as Inactive, meaning all privileges are revoked and the user's login will be inactivated.

User List. screen.

15.3.5 Copying User Security Profiles:

If you have multiple users who will have the same security privileges, you can create one profile, then copy it to other users, streamlining the setup process. To do this:

3. Enter the name and personal information of the user you are adding, then click OK on the Add

New User screen. You will be returned to the Security Privileges screen. The user name you just added will appear in the User List and the Privileges will be those that you copied.

234

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.3.6 Security Privileges Definitions:

Add Inventory: The user will be able to manually add inventory to the system.

Adjust Inventory: The user will be able to adjust inventory amounts.

Administration Privilege: The user will be able to modify existing users' Security Privileges and perform all functions in the system.

Allow PC Login: The user will be able to login to the program.

Audit: The user will be able to perform all audit functions.

Backup and Restore: The user will be able to backup and restore the inventory database.

Be aware that Restore can cause a loss of data added to the database since the date and time of the backup file chosen.

Build Assembly - The user will be able to use the Build Assembly function to add inventory to

Assembly Items.

Check In: The user will be able to Check-In inventory.

Check Out: The user will be able to Check-Out inventory.

Delete: The user will be able to delete records.

Disassembly - The user will be able to disassemble Assembly items.

Edit: The user will be able to make changes to records.

Labels: The user will be able to create labels.

Move: The user will be able to Move inventory to another location.

New: The user will be able to create new items, suppliers, etc.

Pick: The user will be able to pick inventory from pick orders on the Pick screen.

Process Mobile Device Data: The user will be able to process and apply transactions that have been downloaded from a mobile device.

Receive Inventory: The user will be able to mark inventory as Received from purchase orders on the Receive screen.

Remove Inventory: The user will be able to manually Remove inventory.

WDT2200: The user will be able to use a WDT2200 mobile device to perform transactions.

235

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.4 Backing up the Database

Note for Enterprise Users: The Backup feature is not available in the Enterprise version. You must use

SQL to perform backups.

Backing up your database is an important maintenance step that should be performed on a regular basis.

Having a current backup helps to minimize data loss in the case of a system shut down or power failure. If you do experience a catastrophic system failure of some kind, having a current backup ensures you can quickly restore the most recent database. For information on restoring your database, please refer to the

Restoring the Database

topic.

Note: Each time you Audit your inventory, a backup file is automatically created with the date/time included in the file name. For more information on performing an Audit, please refer to the

Auditing

Your Inventory

topic.

Note for Remote Installations:

If you have installed your database on a remote PC/Server (a PC/Server other than the one where you are running InventoryControl), you can specify a folder on that PC/Server to which the backup file will be saved. This option is set on the Options screen. For more information on designating a backup folder, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

Backing Up Your Database:

bottom of the screen.

3. Enter a name for this backup in the Backup File field. It is a good idea to specify a name that will help you select the right backup file later if you need to restore the database. Adding the date in the file name is a good way to know which file is the latest.

By default, the backup file is written to:

C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup

Use the Browse button to select a different location.

Important Note:

The network version of the InventoryControl does NOT browse the file system on the local machine. Instead of the local file system the file system on the machine where the database is installed will be displayed.

236

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.5 Restore the Database

Then software allows you to quickly restore a backup database. This is usually used when there has been some type of catastrophic system loss and allows you to minimize downtime in your business by restoring the last saved database.

You can also restore over an existing database, but keep in mind that restoring erases all data currently in your database and replaces it with the data in the backup, including all inventory, users and items. If there is a chance you will want to recover transactions that have been entered since the backup was done, it is a good idea to backup again before restoring. Save the backup to a different file name than the one you are about to restore.

Note for Enterprise Users: The Backup feature is not available in the Enterprise version. You must use

SQL to perform backups.

Restoring Your Database:

bottom of the screen.

3. Enter the location and name of the backup in the Restore From File field, or you can click

Browse to search for a file

By default, backup files are located in:

C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup

Important Notes:

The network version does NOT browse the file system on the local machine. Instead of the local machine file system, the file system on the machine where the database is installed will be displayed.

If you receive an error when trying to restore the database that states "not all connections to the database are closed", make sure no other users are logged in to the system. Close

InventoryControl and try to restore again.

237

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.6 Options Screen

The Options screen is where you can turn off and on some automatic processes for inventory functions and control how the software performs in certain situations.

Note: This topic lists all options available in the Professional and Enterprise version of InventoryControl.

Not all options are available in the Standard version of InventoryControl or in WaspNest Inventory. For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

This topic covers the following:

Accessing the Options Screen

Inventory Options

Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices

(Batch devices only)

Allow Over Pick

Allow Over Receive

Automatic Customer Number

Automatic Item Numbers

Automatic New

Automatic Notification of Low Order Items

Decimal Places

Enforce Date Code as a True Date

Item Cost When Add Inventory from Mobile Device

Packing Slip for Session

Transaction Code List

Support Options

Check for Software Updates

Close New Form

238

InventoryControl Printable Help

Edit Field Names

Max Row Count

Previously Processed Mobile Data

Show Cost Information During Receiving

(applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions Only)

Show Warning Messages

SQL Server Backup Location

Email Options

Always Show Email Destination List

Packing Slip CC Emails

Pick Order CC Emails

Purchase Order CC Emails

SMTP Password

SMTP Port

SMTP Server

SMTP SSL/TSL

SMTP User

239

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.6.1 Accessing the Options Screen:

From the Main screen, select Tools > Options. The Options screen appears.

All of these options affect all users. Changes made by one user will affect other users who log in.

If the user accessing the Options screen does not have Administration Privileges (setup on the

Security screen), the Options screen will look like the following:

240

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.6.2 Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices

This option pertains to batch devices only.

Negative quantities are not allowed on wireless devices.

This option allows you to remove or move items from inventory on the mobile device even though the quantity of those items may have been at zero, according to the database, the last time the mobile device was synchronized. This option is valuable in a batch processing environment.

If you have more than one mobile device, a situation might arise where some inventory is Added on one mobile device for a location. The next mobile device comes along and sees the inventory ready for

Remove, but since both devices have not been synchronized to the PC, the second device does not show that inventory exists. In this case, if Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is turned off, mobile devices would have to synchronize before the item could be removed.

Leaving this option turned on allows mobile device users to do their job in the field but opens up the possibility of error. The responsibility for confirmation of batch processing on multiple mobile devices falls to the PC user. Many safeguards and methods of verifying the recurring data have been added to help facilitate this effort. See the

Pending Uploads

topic for more information.

To enable this option, select the Yes checkbox.

241

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.6.3 Allow Over Pick

When this option is selected, users can mark more inventory as "picked" than is indicated on the Pick

Order. This applies to the PC and mobile devices.

15.6.4 Allow Over Receive

When this option is selected, users can mark more inventory as "received" than is indicated on the

Purchase Order. This applies to the PC and mobile devices.

15.6.5 Automatic Customer Number

This options allows you to enable automatic generation of a Customer Number when you are creating new customers.

An automatically generated Customer Number will always be 1 greater than the value of the largest customer number currently in your database.

If you are using alphabetic or alphanumeric values as Customer Numbers, the Automatic Customer

Number option will still generate a numeric Customer Number, beginning with a value of 1, if it does not exist already.

15.6.6 Automatic Item Numbers:

This options allows you to enable automatic generation of an Item Number when you are creating a new item or when duplicating an existing item from the Item List.

An automatically generated Item Number will always be 1 greater than the value of the largest Item

Number currently in your database.

If you are using alphabetic or alphanumeric values as Item Numbers, the Automatic Item Number option will still generate a numeric Item Number, beginning with a value of 1, if it does not exist already.

15.6.7 Automatic New

This option enables the automatic opening the New screen when an entered value (Item Number, for example) is not in the database.

When the Automatic New option is enabled:

The Create New Item screen is opened if an unknown Item Number is entered on the Add

Inventory, Create New Purchase Order or Create New Pick Order screen.

The Create New Location screen is opened if an unknown Location is entered on the Add

Inventory screen or in the To Location field of the Move Inventory screen.

The Create New Supplier screen will be opened if an unknown Supplier is entered on the Add

Inventory or Create New Purchase Order screen.

242

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Create New Customer screen will be opened if an unknown Customer is entered on the

Remove Inventory, Create New Pick Order or Check-Out Inventory screens.

When the Automatic New option is disabled:

A prompt will ask you if you want to continue to the appropriate Create New screen. Sometimes, when data input has a high error rate, this is more desirable as it allows the user to verify the number entered.

15.6.8 Automatic Notification of Low Order Items

When this option is enabled, the software will notify you if the Item Stock Level List contains items that have a Quantity value equal to or less than the Min. Stock Level value set for that item and location on the Create New Item or screen/Location tab. This notification appears for the location level only. This notification will appear immediately after logging in to the software.

15.6.9 Decimal Places

This option allows you to set the number of decimal places to display in numeric fields where this is possible.

All values entered in numeric fields are stored to the number of Decimal Places allowed by this option at the time you entered the value, but screens and reports will always display numeric values to the number of Decimal Places currently allowed by this option.

If the number of decimal places currently allowed by this option is greater than the number of decimal places allowed when a value was stored, the value will be displayed with trailing zeros.

For example, if a value of 25.5 was stored when Decimal Places was set to 1, it will be displayed as 25.500 if Decimal Places is later set to 3.

If the number of decimal places currently allowed is less than the number of decimal places allowed when a value was stored, the value, as displayed, will be rounded. For example, if a value of 25.5 was stored when Decimal Places was set to 1, it will be displayed as 26 if Decimal places is later set to 0. (Values rounded for display at the currently specified number of Decimal Places will retain their original number of decimal places as stored in the database.)

Enter a value within the range 0 through 4.

15.6.10 Enforce Date Code as a True Date

When this option is selected, any dates entered into InventoryControl must be in the format mm/dd/yyyy.

15.6.11 Item Cost When Add Inventory from Mobile Device:

Turn this option on to use the item's average cost when adding from a mobile device. Leave this option off (default) to use the item's set cost when adding from a mobile device. Average Cost is the cost of an item over time, including any discounts, price increases, etc. The Item Cost is the value you have entered on the

Create New/Edit Item screen > General Tab

243

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.6.12 Packing Slip for Session:

The packing slip that can be printed and/or emailed upon saving by default displays only items picked in the current pick session. If you want to pick multiple times and print a packing slip that displays all the picks for this pick order, including items picked previously, you can select to do so on the Options screen.

For example:

Assume Pick Order 001 a quantity of 5 for item ABC and a quantity of 4 for item XYZ. Today I pick 2 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them. The packing slip will display 2 ABC and 2 XYZ. Tomorrow I pick the other 3 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them. The packing slip has 3 ABC and 2 XYZ.

This would also be exactly the same if both picks and ships were done on the same day.

If, however, I pick what I have in the morning and don’t ship it and a shipment comes in that day or the next and I complete the order before shipping anything I will want all of the items picked throughout the day to display on one packing slip. To do this, select Yes for this option.

15.6.13 Transaction Code List:

This option affects what displays in the Transaction Code drop down lists on the Audit and Adjust screens. You can choose to show only those transaction codes created by the currently logged in user, or show all transaction codes regardless of who created them. The options available are:

Logged In User - Select this option to display the last ten transaction codes created by the currently logged in user. The last 10 codes created by the current user will display.

All Users - Select this option to display transaction codes created by all users. When you select this option you can also enter the number of transaction codes to show (up to 30).

15.6.14 Check for Software Updates:

When this option is enabled, the system will automatically search for a newer version of the software when you log on to the system. If a new version is found, you will receive a notification and can then go to the Wasp website to download the new version.

This option is enabled when the Yes checkbox is selected. This option is enabled by default. You can disable the option by deselecting the checkbox. Manual checks can still be performed (via the Help menu). For more information on manually checking for updates, please refer to

Checking for Software

Updates

15.6.15 Close New Form:

When this option is turned on, the Create New screen is automatically closed each time a new record is created.

244

InventoryControl Printable Help

When this option is disabled, upon clicking the Save button on the Create New screen, the entry will be saved, the screen will remain open with the fields cleared, ready for another entry. Clicking the Close button will exit the Create New screen.

When this option is enabled, upon clicking the OK button on the Create New screen, the screen will close automatically. Clicking the Cancel button on the Create New screen will exit the form without saving any entry made.

It might be desirable to turn this option off when first entering data, for speed, then turn it on later to avoid confusion when using it infrequently.

15.6.16 Edit Field Names:

When this option is enabled, users setup with Administrative Privileges on the Security screen can edit the names of some labels and tool tips in the software. You might want to change a field name if your business calls one of the functions or fields something different than the default values. Or, you might want to change the tool tip if you want to give special instructions to your users.

For detailed instructions on how to edit fields once this option is enabled, please refer to the

Editing Field

Names

topic.

15.6.17 Max Row Count:

This option allows you to specify the maximum number of rows to be displayed on most lists. The number of rows can be limited to improve performance. If you notice that it takes more than a few seconds for your list screens to appear you can reduce the number of rows to speed this up.

A value of 0 indicates all rows should be displayed.

Values between 1 and 99 are invalid.

100 is the smallest maximum that can be specified.

Transaction List - The Transaction List is handled differently than other lists due to the usually large amount of listings. In the case of the transaction list:

 if 0 is entered, the transaction list is limited to 10,000 rows,

 if there is a maximum set (either higher or lower than 10,000), the list will be limited to the number of rows specified.

For example, if you enter 16,000 in the Maximum Number field, 16,000 rows will be displayed on the

Transaction List.

15.6.18 Previously Processed Mobile Data:

When this option is turned on, the software alerts you if you attempt to upload data from the mobile device to the PC when that data has previously been uploaded.

With this option turned on, if you upload and process data from the mobile device to the PC and then attempt to upload and process that same data again, in the

Pending Uploads

wizard, a symbol displays in the Accept column indicating this data will not be processed again because it has already been processed. Below is an example of the symbol that will appear:

245

InventoryControl Printable Help

When this option is turned off, you still will not be able to re-process data that has already been processed. The drop-down list in the first screen of the Pending Uploads wizard simply will not display the processed XML file.

15.6.19 Show Cost Information During Receiving:

(applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions Only)

When this option is enabled, cost information will display on the Receive screen when you are receiving inventory from a purchase order. This option is disabled by default. To enable this option, select the checkbox.

15.6.20 Show Warning Messages:

This options allows you to enable or disable the display of warning messages.

15.6.21 SQL Server Backup Location:

This option is useful if you have your database installed on a different PC/Server than where you are running the software.

Enter an existing directory on the PC/Server where the SQL database is installed (this is where you installed the database during the initial installation process). Make sure the user who will be performing the backups (Administration Menu > Backup) has permission to the database.

If a location is not entered, the Microsoft SQL Server backup directory will be used to store backups. This is where the system will look for backup files when you try to restore the database as well.

If you specify a folder and SQL Server does not have rights to write to that folder, you will receive an error message and the backup will fail. It is your responsibility to give SQL Server the proper rights to write the backup in the specified folder.

For information on how to give permissions to a folder, please refer to

Wasp Technical Support,

Knowledge Base and Downloads

on the internet.

By default, if you do not have a remote connection to your database, the backup folder is: C:\Program

Files\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL.1\MSSQL\Backup

15.6.22 Always Show Email Destination List:

Select Yes to always have the list of email destinations appear when you select the Send Emails Upon

Save on the New Purchase Order and New Pick Order or the Pick (to email the packing slip) screens.

This list allows you to select the email addresses to which the order will be sent.

246

InventoryControl Printable Help

If you deselect the Yes checkbox, the list will not appear and the emails will automatically be sent to every address on the list.

15.6.23 Packing Slip CC Emails:

You can enter email address here to which a copy of the slip will automatically be sent if you have the

Email Packing Slip checkbox selected on the Pick screen. The CC email addresses are in addition to any email addresses selected on the Pick screen - Email Destination List (see above).

15.6.24 Pick Order CC Emails:

You can enter email address here to which a copy of the order will automatically be sent if you have the

Email On Save checkbox selected on the Create New Pick Order screen. The CC email addresses are in addition to any email addresses selected on the Create New Pick Order screen - Email Destination

List (see above).

15.6.25 Purchase Order CC Emails:

You can enter email address here to which a copy of the order will automatically be sent if you have the

Email On Save checkbox selected on the Create New Purchase Order screen. The CC email addresses are in addition to any email addresses selected on the Create New Purchase Order screen -

Email Destination List (see above).

15.6.26 SMTP Password:

If your SMTP server requires authentication to send outgoing mail, enter the password here. If it does not require authentication, leave this field blank.

15.6.27 SMTP Port:

Enter the SMTP mail server listening port here. The default port is 25.

15.6.28 SMTP Server:

Enter the name of an outgoing mail server that supports SMTP for delivering notification emails. Enter the name of the same outgoing mail server that is setup in your own email program. If you do not was

InventoryControl to send notification emails, leave this field blank.

15.6.29 SMTP SSL/TSL:

Turn this option on for all SMTP servers that require SSL or TSL, including GMail SMTP servers.

Note on using GMail: To use a GMail SMTP server to send out mail from InventoryControl:

1. Go to www.gmail.com and setup your gmail account.

2. Have your IT department open port 587 and 465 on your computer.

3. Turn on the SMTP SSL/TSL option, and set up the other SMTP related options on the Options screen.

247

InventoryControl Printable Help

The GMail SMTP server address is smtp.gmail.com. The SMTP user should be

'[email protected]' (don't forget @gmail.com). The SMTP Password is your Gmail account password.

Please be aware that you need to turn this option on for all SMTP servers that require SSL or TSL, not just for GMail SMTP servers.

15.6.30 SMTP User:

If your SMTP server requires authentication to send outgoing mail, enter the user name here. If it does not require authentication, leave this field blank.

248

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.7 Archiving Transactions

The Archive Transaction feature allows you to archive inactive transactions prior to a specified date.

This date defaults to the value specified when you enabled this option on the Options screen. For more information on enabling this option, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic.

Only inactive transactions are eligible for archive. These are transactions that no longer impact the current inventory. For instance, if you added a quantity of 10 to a specific item number and all of those have since been removed, the initial add transaction is inactive and will be archived if it occurred before the date specified.

Archiving is useful to keep your database running quickly by storing unused information.

Archiving Transactions:

appears. it at the default date. archiving any data.

4. If desired, you can run the Transaction History (Archived) Report to review the archived transactions.

249

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.8 Editing Field Names

When the Edit Field Names option is enabled on the Options screen, users setup with Administrative

Privileges on the Security screen can edit some field and function names. Editing Field Names is useful if your business calls one of the functions or fields something different than the default values, or if you want to change the Tool Tip (the text that appears when you hover the cursor over a field) to provide special instructions to your users. For example, if your business refers to adding inventory as increasing inventory, you may want to change the name of the Add field to Increase to avoid confusion for your employees.

For more information on the Options screen, please refer to the

Options Screen

topic. For more information on setting security privileges, please refer to the

Security Privileges

topic.

Please see the

Using Custom Fields

topic for additional information about customizing this software.

This topic discusses:

Editing Field Names

Resetting Field Names to their Default Values

15.8.1 Editing Field Names:

1. When this option is enabled several field names throughout the program will appear in recessed boxes, as seen below. Note: The Check-In and Check-Out options are disabled for WaspNest

Inventory.

Click on a recessed label, such as Add. The Customize Field screen appears:

250

InventoryControl Printable Help

2. You can change the text of the Label (or field name) and that field's associated Tool Tip or click

Set to Default to reset the field and tool tip to its original name.

Note: Some fields allow the you to edit the tool tip and not the label itself. This is because some label names must remain fixed due to internal constraints.

The Form field is disabled, as shown above, for labels throughout the program except for some of the labels on the Create New Item screen. The Form field for these few labels on the Create

New Item screen permit you to specify custom tool tips for different Inventory screens like Add,

Remove, etc. The same label is used for each, but the tool tips can be unique.

For example, in the screen shot below, we are customizing the Item Number label on the Create

New Item screen. Here, the Form field is enabled and Item has been selected from the drop down list.

The custom Label value, "Stock #:" that we entered will appear on all screens instead of the default Label value, "Item Number", and the custom Tool Tip value, "Enter Stock # in this

field. Stock # must be unique.", will appear on all screens as well (instead of the original Tool tip).

Next we change the Form value from Item (the default Form value shown above) to

Inventory_Transactions, as seen in the drop down list below.

Now the custom Label, "Stock #", will continue to appear on all screens instead of the default

Label value, "Item Number", but the custom Tool Tip will only be displayed where this field occurs within all of the Inventory transactions.

251

InventoryControl Printable Help

The scope of the custom Tool Tip for this field could be narrowed further by selecting a single

Inventory transaction, such as Remove from the Form drop down list.

3. Now select if you want this field to be Visible and/or Required.

De-selecting the Visible option completely removes the field from the forms where it occurs. This can be used to streamline data input operations by removing the distraction of unused fields. (The label will still be visible while the Edit Labels option is turned on.)

Selecting the Required option makes data entry mandatory for transactions that use the field being customized. The Visible option will be grayed-out when the Required option is selected

(Required fields must be visible).

Some customizable fields must be both visible and required for the software to perform correctly.

In this case, the Visible and Required checkboxes will be disabled.

15.8.2 Resetting Field Names to their Default Values:

You can quickly restore the default values for all editable fields by following the instructions below.

A message appears asking if you want to reset all field names to their default values.

Note: The Reset All Field Names option on the Tools menu is disabled if the Edit Field Names option is disabled on the Options screen or the user currently logged in does not have Administrative

Privileges.

252

InventoryControl Printable Help

15.9 Using Custom Fields

Dates tabs can be found on each of the following screens:

Create New Customer

Create New Manufacturer

Create New Item

Create New Site

Create New Location

Create New Supplier.

Options

Screen

topic. Below is an example of the Custom Texts tab found on the screens mentioned above:

253

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: The fields seen above are not visible when the Edit Field Names option is turned off and no customizations have been applied.

Custom Numbers fields will accept values ranging from -999999999999999.9999 to

999999999999999.9999.

Custom Dates will be displayed in the same format as found elsewhere in the product: "day of the week, month dd, ccyy"

Example:

Here, with the Edit Field Names option enabled, we have clicked on the Custom Text 1 label (on the

Custom Texts tab of the Create New Customer screen) to edit it. The Form field is grayed-out because this label only occurs on the Customer screen.

Click OK to save the customization or Cancel to abort.

When the Edit Field Names option is subsequently disabled, the Customer Screen/Custom Texts tab appear as shown below:

254

InventoryControl Printable Help

This field will also be seen in the Edit Customer screen.

255

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 16 - Importing/Exporting

16.1 Importing Into the Database

Import allows you to bring data into the program's database from external sources such as .CSV or .TXT files. This allows you to quickly add information to your database rather than having to manually add it when you are initially setting up your software.

Data must be imported into the database in the following order:

1. Site

2. Locations

3. Suppliers

4. Manufacturers

5. Customers

6. Items

7. Inventory

Samples for each import type are installed in the InventoryControl/Import Samples folder. Use these samples to verify you have the correct data and format.

This topic covers:

Tips for Importing Data

How to Import Data

Required Fields

Handling Import Errors

Notes on Importing Inventory

16.1.1 Tips for Importing Data:

 Do not attempt to use Import to modify existing records.

 Imported data will be truncated if field lengths exceed those within the program's database. Data

Types and Sizes for each Table that can receive data via Import are documented in the

Database Properties

topic.

 If your data normally resides in a different data format, you must first use your existing database software's File > Export or File > Save As function to translate the data to a .csv or .txt file.

 You must strip out all currency symbols, including (but not limited to) these examples: $, ¢ , ¥, £,

§, or ¤, if you are about to import them into a numeric field, such as Cost, List Price, etc. They

256

InventoryControl Printable Help

are permissible in text fields.

 Commas, sometimes used as "thousands" separators, should be removed from numeric fields.

 Commas are permissible in text fields only when residing within a pair of double quotes, which will cause them to be treated as normal text, not as field delimiters.

 If you intend to import data to all available tables, make sure you import in the order specified above. It is also a good idea to review the information found in the

Related Data Fields

topic before proceeding with importing information.

16.1.2 How to Import Data:

In the example below, we will show how to import Locations. The steps are the same for importing all other types of information. bottom of the screen.

Destination Data screen will appear.

3. Enter the location and file name of the file you want to import, or click the ... button located to the right of the Import File field to search for a file. Then select the table to which you want to import data from the To table drop down menu.

257

InventoryControl Printable Help

Delimiters are used to separate the data items in a database (the columns in the database table) when transporting the database to another application. For example, a comma-separated values file (CSV file) is one in which each value in the cells of a table row is delimited by and separated from the next value by a comma. The beginning of a row is indicated by a new line character.

5. Specify the field Delimiter used in the file from which you are importing data. This will always be a comma for .csv files, but any of the characters shown in the list box can be used with .txt files.

The preview window at the bottom of the screen will show you if your selected Delimiter is correct by displaying each column the system finds in your file when using that Delimiter. If all the data is in one column of the preview pane, you have not selected the right Delimiter.

Select the First row contains column headings option only if the first record of the file you are importing does not contain actual data. Import cannot remove subtotals, section headers, or any other records within the file that do not match the format of the actual data records. These must be removed before you attempt the import.

258

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Field Mapping screen allows you to associate columns which occur within your imported data file and corresponding fields within the table into which data will be written. Depending on the contents of your original database, not every column in your imported data needs to be mapped to a corresponding field in the program. The object is to bring over at least the required fields and any others that may be of use.

Note: If the First Row Contains Column Heading checkbox was checked in Step 2, the Import

Wizard automatically compares the import file's Import Data Column heading to the Map To column heading. If a match is found, the Import Wizard populates the Field Mapping Import Data

Column and Map To values. You may change the mapping for any column if necessary.

Special Note for Importing Items: When importing into the Item table, there are seven Map To fields which allow you to use the Import Data Columns for the purpose of enabling or disabling the Item To Be Tracked By or Require the user to fill out options found on the Create New Item and Edit Item screens. For more information on these options, please refer to the

Create New

Item

topic.

Tracked By or Required Option is

Enabled For This Record

True

Yes

Tracked By or Required Option is

Disabled For This Record

False

259

InventoryControl Printable Help

0 1

These values are case-insensitive, but they are the only values allowed. Anything else will be rejected by Import. The default value is False.

The Map To fields, to which data columns containing these True/False values can be mapped, are named as follows in the Map To drop list:

 Date Code (Track by?)

 Lot (Track by?)

 Pallet (Track by?)

 Serial Number (Track by?)

 Customer (Required ?)

 PO (Required ?)

 Supplier (Required ?)

If, for example, you wanted every item being imported to be tracked by Serial Number, you could create a new column in your source data that contains the word "yes" in every cell of that column. If you chose to name this column TrackSer in your source data, you would then map from the TrackSer column to the

Serial Number (Track by?) field.

You could just as easily edit this TrackSer column to turn on Serial Number tracking for some items and not others, by specifying values of "yes" or "no", as necessary. In either case, when you import the items, mapping your TrackSer column to the Serial Number (Track by?) field will correctly set the Tracked By

Serial Number option for each item being imported. This negates the need to manually edit each imported item's Item To Be Tracked By Serial Number option after importing the items.

True/False, T/F, Yes/No or 0/1 columns can be added to your source data for any or all of the seven Map

To fields shown above, so that the Tracked By and Required options are set for each item at the time of import.

Each record added to an

Auto Generated Number

field takes the maximum number present in its column and increments this value by 1. For an import, if the Employee table already has an ID field value that is equal to 100 and the Import Wizard recognized that your import file contains a value in a mapped column that is equal to or less than 100, it will present you with a Default Value of the first import record.

All subsequent imported records will increment this value by 1. If this condition does not exist, the import will proceed with the values included in the import delimited text file.

will appear that the data has been imported. You can verify the import by going to the List screen

(Main Screen > Lists) and viewing the list for that type of information. For example, if you just imported Locations, view the Locations List to verify the new information is there.

260

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.1.3 Required Import Fields:

All tables have some required fields that must be mapped. These are listed below:

Table Required Fields

Site Site

Manufacturer Name

Item

Inventory

Item Number, Item Type

Item Number, Quantity, Site and Location

Example: Site and Location are required fields for importing Locations. If you fail to map columns for the

Location table's required fields, you will receive this prompt:

16.1.4 Handling Import Errors:

If any of the information you just imported contains errors, a message will appear when you click the

Finish button telling you to check the error report. Click OK on this message to view the Error report.

It is not uncommon to get an error like this when duplicates occur in your source data. Duplicate errors can be ignored and the Import can be considered to have completed successfully. For other error types, find the records that are in error; fix them; make a new import file (.txt or .csv) containing only these records and do another Import. Alternatively, you can enter these records manually.

261

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.1.5 Notes on Importing Inventory:

The steps for importing inventory are the same as those listed above; however, there is some important information to be aware of when you are importing inventory:

 Importing data into the Inventory table is optional. It is equivalent to manually adding inventory at the PC. Quantity and Location data, imported along with an Item Number, increases Item quantities in the database. You cannot remove inventory by importing negative quantities.

 The value specified in the Select Site screen/From Site field can impact the Locations into which imported Inventory information will be recorded. When something other than <all> is specified as your From site, imported inventory will be put into Locations at the specified From Site. If you have varying Site information you wish to import along with the Location and Quantity data for each Item Number, you must make sure the From Site is set to <all> in Select Site before importing data into the Inventory table. For further information on the Select Site screen, please

see the

Select Site

topic.

 Item Number, Quantity, Site and Location are all required fields for Importing into the Inventory table. If, while importing Inventory data, a previously unknown value for either Item Number,

Site, Location, or Supplier Code is read, a new Item Number, Site, Location or Supplier Code will not be created using the new value. Instead, the Inventory record being imported will be

rejected. Negative values for Quantity can also cause an Inventory record to be rejected.

 If one or more Tracked By or Require the user to fill out options are enabled for the Item Number specified in an Inventory record that fails to supply that information, the record will be rejected.

For more information on these options, please refer to the

Create New Item

topic.

262

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.2 Exporting to a Text File

This software allows you to create text files containing data from one or more fields within each of the program's tables. For example, if you want to create a text file of all of the manufacturers in your database, the Export function allows you to quickly do this.

Data types and sizes for each table from which data can be exported are documented in the

Database

Properties

topic.

How to Export Data:

bottom of the screen.

Destination Data screen appears.

3. Select the table from which you want to export from the Export Table drop down menu. Then select the file to which you want to export the data. Here, the Supplier table has been selected for import to an external file named Suppliers.csv (a comma separated values file). Export also supports creation of .TXT files.

263

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Export Field Selection screen allows you to select which of the Fields available in the table you have chosen to pull data from will be exported to the specified file. button to To select a field, highlight a listing in the Fields available screen, then click the add it to the Fields selected box.

Click the button to add all of the available fields to the Fields selected box.

After adding one or more fields to the Fields selected box, you can use the buttons to return fields to the Fields available box.

The graphic below displays this screen with all Fields available selected.

264

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. When you are finished selecting all the fields you want to use, click the Up or Down buttons to sequence the fields in the desired order. This is the order they will appear in your exported file.

The Preview window at the bottom of the screen displays how your file will look.

265

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Destination File Format screen allows you to specify the Field Delimiter of choice and whether or not to Include field names on first row.

Delimiters are used to separate the data items in a database (the columns in the database table) when transporting the database to another application. For example, a comma-separated values file(CSV file) is one in which each value in the cells of a table row is delimited by and separated from the next value by a comma. The beginning of a row is indicated by a new line character.

If the file name you specified in Step 1 uses the extension .CSV, you must specify <Comma> as your field delimiter (the default). If you specified a file name with the extension of .TXT in Step 1, you may use any of the field delimiters available in the drop list (as long as the chosen character does not occur within the data itself.) stating your export was successful.

You can confirm the export by opening and reviewing the .csv or .txt file you specified in Step 1.

Exports can be performed from any of the program's tables: Location, Supplier, Manufacturer,

Item, Customer or Inventory.

266

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.3 Related Data Fields

Location Table Supplier Table Manufacturer

Table

Site

Location

Supplier Code

Name

Item Table Inventory

Table

Site

Location

Supplier Code Supplier Code

Manufacturer

Item Number Item Number

The chart above shows the related data fields that exist within the database tables. The chart should be interpreted from left to right:

 If you will be importing data into both the Location table and the Inventory table:

The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Location table's Site and Location fields must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Inventory table's Site and Location fields. The actual Import file used for the Location import does not have to be used for the Inventory import. It's the Site and Location values themselves which must be the same in both Imports to create the proper connections between the

Location and Inventory tables.

If, while importing Inventory data, a previously unknown Site or Location value is read, a new

Site and/or Location will be created using the new value; the Inventory record being imported will not be associated with an existing Site and Location.

 If you will be importing data into the Supplier table and the Item table (or into the Supplier table and both the Item and Inventory tables):

The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Supplier table's Supplier Code field must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Item or Inventory table's Supplier Code field. The actual Import file used for the Supplier import does not have to be used for the Item or Inventory import. It's the Supplier Code values themselves which must be the same in both Imports (or in all three Imports) to create the proper connections between the Supplier and Item tables (or between the Supplier, Item and Inventory tables).

If, while importing Item data, a previously unknown Supplier Code value is read, a new

Supplier Code will be created using the new value; the Item record being imported will not be associated with an existing Supplier Code.

If, while importing Inventory data, a previously unknown Supplier Code value is read, a new

Supplier Code will not be created using the new value; the Inventory record being imported will be

rejected.

267

InventoryControl Printable Help

 If you will be importing data into both the Manufacturer table and the Item table:

The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the

Manufacturer table's Name field must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Item table's Manufacturer field. The actual Import file used for the Manufacturer import does not have to be used for the Item import. It's the Name and Manufacturer values themselves which must be the same in both Imports to create the proper connections between the

Manufacturer and Item tables.

If, while importing Item data, a previously unknown Manufacturer value is read, a new

Manufacturer will be created using the new value; the Item record being imported will not be associated with an existing Manufacturer.

 If you will be importing data into both the Item table and the Inventory table:

The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Item table's

Item Number's field must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the

Inventory table's Item Number field. The actual Import file used for the Item import does not have to be used for the Inventory import. It's the Item Number values themselves which must be the same in both Imports to create the proper connections between the Item and Inventory tables.

If, while importing Inventory data, a previously unknown value for either Item Number, Site,

Location, or Supplier Code is read, a new Item Number, Site, Location or Supplier Code will not be created using the new value; the Inventory record being imported will be rejected. Negative values for Quantity can also cause an Inventory record to be rejected. Lastly, if one or more

Tracked By or Require the user to fill out options are enabled for the Item Number specified in an

Inventory record that fails to supply that information, the record will be rejected. These errors will be listed in the Import-Export Error Report .

These same relationships apply when using Create New Location , Create New Supplier , Create New

Manufacturer , Create New Item or Add Inventory .

The Customer table's fields are not related to fields within any of the other tables.

268

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.4 Import Specifics

This topic lists all Field Names, Data Types and Sizes for the fields that can be imported.

The import wizard contained in this software can automatically map the columns in your import files to the correct column in the database. To do this, however, the column header must match one that the wizard is looking for and the data type must be correct. Below is the header and data type the import wizard is expecting. Modify your .csv or .txt file with the correct column header to simply the import process. The order in which your columns are arranged in your file does not matter. You can also find a .csv file with the header and one row of sample data on the installation cd that came with this product.

The imported file formats discussed in this topic are:

Customer

Inventory

Item

Location

Manufacturer

Supplier

Data Type Definitions

are listed after the Table Properties.

16.4.1 Customer Import Format:

Column Header

Cell No

Company Name

Custom Date 1

Custom Date 2

Custom Date 3

Custom Date 4

Custom Date 5

Custom Number 1

Custom Number 2

Custom Number 3

Custom Number 4

Custom Number 5

Custom Text 1

Custom Text 2

Custom Text 3

Data Type

varchar varchar datetime datetime datetime datetime datetime decimal decimal decimal decimal decimal varchar varchar varchar

Size (Precision,

Scale)

9(15,4)

100

269

Custom Text 4

Custom Text 5

Custom Text 6

Custom Text 7

Custom Text 8

Custom Text 9

Custom Text 10

Customer No.

Date Added

Department

FAX

Home Phone

Name

Notes

Phone

Cell Phone

Customer Billing Address

Customer Billing City varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar datetime varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar

250

100

1000

100

100 varchar 50

Customer Billing State

Customer Billing Postal

Code

Customer Billing Country

Customer Billing Mail

Drop varchar varchar varchar varchar

Note: You may have multiple address information for shipping, mailing, etc.

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.4.2 Inventory Import Format:

Field Name

Date Acquired

Date Code

Item Description

Item Number

Location

Lot

Pallet

Quantity

Serial Number

Data Type

datetime varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar decimal varchar

Size (Precision,

Scale)

255

9(18,4)

270

Site

Supplier Code varchar varchar

16.4.3 Item Import Format:

Field Name

Alt Item Number

16.4.4 Location Table Properties:

Field Name

Custom Date 1

Custom Date 2

Custom Date 3

Custom Date 4

Custom Date 5

Custom Number 1

Custom Number 2

Custom Number 3

Custom Number 4

Custom Number 5

Custom Text 1

Custom Text 2

Custom Text 3

Custom Text 4

Custom Text 5

Custom Text 6

Custom Text 7

Custom Text 8

Custom Text 9

Custom Text 10

Description

Location

Notes

Site

Data Type

datetime datetime datetime datetime datetime decimal decimal decimal decimal decimal varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar

Size (Precision,

Scale)

9(15,4)

100

255

1000

272

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.4.5 Manufacturer Table Properties:

Field Name

Address 1

Address 2

City

Contact Cell No

Contact Ext.

Contact FAX

Contact Name

Contact Phone

Country

Custom Date 1

Custom Date 2

Custom Date 3

Custom Date 4

Custom Date 5

Custom Number 1

Custom Number 2

Custom Number 3

Custom Number 4

Custom Number 5

Custom Text 1

Custom Text 2

Custom Text 3

Custom Text 4

Custom Text 5

Custom Text 6

Custom Text 7

Custom Text 8

Custom Text 9

Custom Text 10

Extension

FAX

Mail Stop

Name

Notes

Phone

Postal Code

State

Web Site

Data Type

decimal decimal decimal varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar datetime datetime datetime datetime datetime decimal decimal varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar

100

250

9(15,4)

100

Size (Precision,

Scale)

100

9(15,4)

1000

255

273

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.4.6 Supplier Table Properties:

Field Name

Address 1

Address 2

City

Contact Cell No

Contact Ext.

Contact FAX

Contact Name

Contact Phone

Country

Custom Date 1

Custom Date 2

Custom Date 3

Custom Date 4

Custom Date 5

Custom Number 1

Custom Number 2

Custom Number 3

Custom Number 4

Custom Number 5

Custom Text 1

Custom Text 2

Custom Text 3

Custom Text 4

Custom Text 5

Custom Text 6

Custom Text 7

Custom Text 8

Custom Text 9

Custom Text 10

Extension

FAX

Mail Stop

Name

Notes

Phone

Postal Code

State

Supplier Code

Web Site

Data Type

decimal varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar datetime datetime datetime datetime datetime decimal decimal decimal decimal varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar

100

9(15,4)

100

Size (Precision,

Scale)

100

250

1000

255

274

InventoryControl Printable Help

16.4.7 Data Type Definitions:

 The maximum sizes permitted by the data types defined below are greater than the field lengths used in the database. Refer to the sizes given in the tables above to avoid truncation when using

Import.

 Any field defined in the tables above that has a length of only one character expects one of the following values (case insensitive): o

For False: "0", "F", "False", "No", "N" o

For True: "1", "T", "True", "Yes", "Y"

char Fixed-length non-Unicode character data with a maximum length of 8,000 characters.

datetime Date and time data from January 1, 1753, through December 31, 9999, with an accuracy of three-hundredths of a second, or 3.33 milliseconds.

Valid Alphabetic datetime Formats

for Microsoft® SQL Server™ 2000 date data

(characters enclosed in brackets are optional):

Apr[il] [15][,] 1996 -- (mdy)

Apr[il] 15[,] [19]96 -- (mdy)

Apr[il] 1996 [15] -- (mdy)

[15] Apr[il][,] 1996 -- (dmy)

15 Apr[il][,][19]96 -- (dmy)

15 [19]96 apr[il] -- (dmy)

[15] 1996 apr[il] -- (dmy)

1996 APR[IL] [15] -- (ymd)

1996 [15] APR[IL] -- (ymd)

Suggestion: To avoid ambiguity, use four-digit years.

If the day is missing, the first day of the month is supplied.

Any of the alphabetic datetime formats shown above may be used -as long as- the format you select conforms to the year, month and date sequence exhibited by the Long Date format in effect on your PC. This can be found at:

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional Options > Date tab > Long Date format

275

InventoryControl Printable Help

For example, if your Long Date format, as shown in Regional Options is dddd,

MMMM dd, yyyy (Friday, June 27, 2003), you can use any of the mdy alphabetic formats shown above, but you can not use any of the dmy or ymd formats.

Valid Numeric datetime Formats

for Microsoft® SQL Server™ 2000 (characters enclosed in brackets are optional):

number separator number separator number [time] [time]

[0]4/15/[19]96 -- (mdy)

[0]4-15-[19]96 -- (mdy)

[0]4.15.[19]96 -- (mdy)

[04]/[19]96/15 -- (myd)

15/[0]4/[19]96 -- (dmy)

15/[19]96/[0]4 -- (dym)

[19]96/15/[0]4 -- (ydm)

[19]96/[04]/15 -- (ymd)

Slash marks (/), hyphens (-), or periods (.) may be used as separators.

Any of the numeric datetime formats shown above may be used -as long as- the format you select conforms to the year, month and date sequence exhibited by the

Short Date format in effect on your PC. This can be found at:

Start > Settings > Control Panel > Regional Options > Date tab > Short Date format

For example, if your Short Date format, as shown in Regional Options is M/d/yyyy

(6/27/2003), you can use any of the mdy numeric formats shown above, but you can

not use any of the dmy, ydm, ymd, myd, or dym formats.

decimal Fixed precision and scale numeric data from -10^38 +1 through 10^38 -1.

Precision specifies the maximum total number of decimal digits that can be stored, both to the left and to the right of the decimal point.

Scale specifies the maximum number of decimal digits that can be stored to the right of the

decimal point.

Size is the number of storage bytes consumed internally - this value should be ignored when determining whether or not a decimal value will be truncated - use Precision and

276

InventoryControl Printable Help

Scale instead, to make this assessment. Size can and should be used for all other Data

Types.

int Integer (whole number) data from -2^63 (-9223372036854775808) through 2^63-1

(9223372036854775807).

money Monetary data values from -2^63 (-922,337,203,685,477.5808) through 2^63 - 1

(+922,337,203,685,477.5807), with accuracy to a ten-thousandth of a monetary unit.

This data type is limited to a maximum of four decimal points. Use a period to separate partial monetary units, like cents, from whole monetary units. For example, 2.15 specifies 2 dollars and

15 cents.

Comma separators are not allowed.

varchar Variable-length non-Unicode data with a maximum of 8,000 characters.

277

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 17 - Performing an Audit

17.1 Auditing Your Inventory

As many business owners know, keeping accurate counts of inventory is a critical part of maintaining a well-run business. For instance, if an inventory item is listed in the system as having met its reorder point, but the quantity in the system is based on an inaccurate count, your business could end up wasting money on reordering inventory that was not in danger of being depleted. On the other hand, if your system lists plenty of inventory for an item that is actually at or below the reorder point, you could be faced with too little stock on hand to fulfill orders, creating a costly back-order situation. Many business owners also know that getting accurate counts can be a time-consuming task.

Note: All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition. The screens and available features in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ. For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory, please select Help > Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen.

With these issues in mind, the software was designed with a built-in audit mode that allows you to conveniently conduct audits at the PC and on one or more mobile devices while preventing access to such features as Remove and Add so that you can be assured you are getting accurate count comparisons.

Audit Mode allows you to check the counts of all your inventory while disabling the Add, Remove, Move,

Adjust and Check-In and Check-Out features to make sure inventory counts in the system do not change while you are performing the audit. If you are using mobile devices, you can use them simultaneously with the PC to perform an audit by downloading the database in audit mode to each device. Audit Mode features a simple Audit screen that allows you to enter your counts for inventory in each location and compares these to the counts already in the system. You can then view the Complete Audit screen to review any discrepancies between your counts and what was in the system. At the click of a button you can reconcile the counts or you can select certain transactions to accept or reject. This software also comes equipped with several Audit Reports that allow you to review a variety of information at-a-glance.

The topics listed below are included in this section. It is best to review these topics in order as they outline the flow of performing an audit.

Audit Flow Overview

Beginning the Audit

Using the Audit Screen

Reviewing the Not Counted Items Report

Reconciling Your Counts on the Complete Audit screen

Reviewing the Remainder of the Audit Reports

Ending the Audit

278

InventoryControl Printable Help

17.2 Audit Flow Overview

The audit process in this software is broken into 7 steps:

1. Create a pre-audit backup of your database. system while in audit mode and download it to the mobile devices to be used during the audit. If you are using a wireless connection, you will not need to download the audit database. Your mobile device will connect to the database as usual. back to the PC).

5. Reconcile your counts entered in the Audit screen against the counts that were in the system.

6. Review the remainder of the Audit Reports.

17.3 Beginning the Audit

screen. message appears reminding you to create a pre-audit backup of your database, if you have not already done so. backup now. We recommend you create the backup file with a name similar to the following:

Pre-Audit-yyyy-mm-dd-hh-mm-ss.bkp

This backup of your database can be restored later, if necessary, but you will lose any transactions completed since that backup. For more information on creating backups, please refer to the

Backing Up the Database

topic.

Select OK to begin the audit without creating a backup (this is not recommended).

The screen will prominently display a message that Audit Mode is active and most of the

Inventory menu will be disabled. An example of the Inventory menu with Audit Mode activated

279

is displayed below:

InventoryControl Printable Help

With

Audit Mode Active

, you should next create mobile databases and download them to mobile devices if you will be using mobile devices for the audit. If you are using a wireless device, you will not need to download the database.

5. Now you can begin entering counts manually on the PC or on the mobile devices via the Audit screen. For information on using the Audit screen on the mobile device, please refer to the

Working with Mobile Devices section of this help file:

WDT2200 - Auditing Inventory

Windows Mobile Device - Auditing Inventory

17.4 Using the Audit Screen

Now that you have started the Audit Mode on the PC and (optionally) downloaded the audit database to your mobile devices, you can begin your counts.

To enter your counts on the PC:

280

Mode). The Audit screen appears:

InventoryControl Printable Help

Add button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the

Pending Transaction List.)

Clicking the button will unlock the field.

2. Complete the Item fields: Enter the Item Number of the item you want to audit. To enter an

Item List. You cannot create a new item during an audit.

Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields:

 Location

 Quantity (unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number - Set on the Add or

Edit Item screens, which fixes the Quantity to a value of 0 or 1)

 Any of the associated Tracked By fields: Serial Number, Date Code, Lot or

Pallet (Set on the Add or Edit Item screens). A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created.

Items tracked by serial number that are checked-out cannot be audited.

Below is an example of the Audit screen enabled:

281

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Enter a Transaction Code (optional): This field allows you to type in a value or select a previously-entered code that describes the transaction.

4. Enter Notes (optional): This field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction.

5. After you have entered all information on the screen, click the Audit button. The audit transaction will be added to the Pending Transaction List.

The Audit button is not enabled until a valid value is entered in the Item Number field and the

Location field.

6. After reviewing the Pending Transaction List, click the OK button to post the audit transactions to your database.

You can highlight an item in the Pending Transaction List and click the Remove button to remove it from the list. You can select the Remove All button to remove all pending transactions from the list.

Audit's pending transactions are handled differently than other inventory transactions. All pending transactions are listed (those just added as well as those previously added.) They do not go away until they are reconciled or removed from the list.

7. Repeat these steps for each item for which you want to update quantity. After you have finished updating quantity for all audited items (and downloaded any audit data from the mobile devices, if used) you are ready to review the Not Counted Items Report.

282

InventoryControl Printable Help

17.5 Reviewing the Not Counted Items Report

This software contains several audit reports that allow you to review count and discrepancy information.

Most of these reports are useful for review after the audit is completed and are discussed later in this topic. The Not Counted Items Report, however, should be reviewed before you reconcile your counts.

This report lists any items for which quantity was not entered into the system either through the Audit screen on the PC or via the mobile devices. By reviewing this report, you can quickly determine if any items were missed during the audit.

To View the Not Counted Items Report:

screen appears displaying all Audit reports. opens in the Report Viewer. For more information on viewing reports, please refer to the

Report

Viewer

topic.

3. Review the report and add counts for any items that were missed. After you have entered any additional quantities into the system, you are ready to reconcile your counts.

17.6 Reconciling the Counts

The next step in the audit process is to reconcile your counts against those that were already in the system. You can view this screen and reconcile as you go along, or you can wait until all counts are entered and reconcile once before ending the audit.

To Reconcile:

screen appears:

283

InventoryControl Printable Help

This screen lists all audit transactions and includes the following columns:

 Item Number

 Current Quantity - This is the quantity that was listed for this item in the system prior to the audit.

 Audited Quantity - This is the quantity that you entered for this item on the Audit screen. You can update this field on the Complete Audit screen by selecting the field and typing in a new number or by using the up or down arrow buttons next to the field.

 Location - The location you selected for this item on the Audit screen.

 Serial Number, Lot, Pallet - These appear populated only if this item is tracked by one or more of these fields.

2. Select from the Action column what action you want to take with the selected item. Your options are:

 Audited Qty - Selecting this option means the system will keep the audited quantity you entered for this item on the Audit screen.

 Current Qty - Selecting this option means the system will keep the quantity that was listed in the system prior to the audit.

 Ignore Record - When the audit is ended, no action will be taken on this record.

Quantity amounts will stay the same for this item. The system will behave as though this item was not audited. The item will not appear on any audit reports.

You must remove those items you mark as Ignore Record from the Pending

Transaction List tab on the Audit screen before you can end the audit.

3. After you have selected an action for all items on the list, click the OK button to post the transactions to your database. You are now ready to end the audit.

284

InventoryControl Printable Help

17.7 Reviewing the Remainder of the Audit Reports

This software contains several audit reports that allow you to review a variety of information. Available reports are:

 Accepted Audit Discrepancies Report

 Accepted Audit Result Report

 Audit History by Audit Date

 Audit History by Item Number

 Not Counted Item Report

 Unreconciled Audit Discrepancies

 Unreconciled Audit Report

These reports are accessed by click the Reports icon on the Main Screen. The reports are viewed in the

Reports Viewer. For more information on viewing reports, please refer to the

Report Viewer

topic.

17.8 Ending the Audit

The last step in the audit process is to end the Audit Mode session on your PC so all features are enabled. To do this:

If you have not reconciled all transactions on the Complete Audit screen (including removing any records marked as Ignore Record from the Audit screen/Pending Transactions List tab), the

Complete Audit screen will appear. For information on using this screen, please refer to the

Reconciling the Counts

topic, above.

If you have reconciled all transactions, the following message will appear: and you will have access to all features on the Inventory menu.

285

InventoryControl Printable Help

Chapter 18 - Search Function

18.1 Searching for Information

The Find screen allows you to easily search for information within the Inventory Control database. You can limit your search to a specific

table (Information you enter into each field in InventoryControl is stored in a database "table" behind the scenes. You can extract this information using the Export Wizard.)

in the database, field or even a value within a field on the Find screen.

Searching for Information:

2. Select what you want to search for by clicking on an option in the Find menu. In this example we are going to search for Customers.

You can also access this screen by clicking the Filter button at the top of the List screens.

Note: If the table you select (Customers, Manufacturers, Items, etc.) contains over 1000 pieces of data, you will automatically be taken to the Advanced Find screen. For further information on the Advanced Find screen, please refer to the

Advanced Find

topic.

 Table is used to select the table you want to search.

 Field is used to select the field in the listed table to be searched.

 Value is the information for which you are searching.

Selecting the Whole Word Only checkbox will search the selected table based upon the your entire entry in the Value field. Partial matches will be excluded from the search results.

286

InventoryControl Printable Help

Selecting the Find All checkbox disables the Field and Value fields. The search results will display all of the records from the table selected in Search.

You can click the Advanced button to go to the Advanced Find screen which provides you with more search options. displaying all the records that match your criteria.

All searches are case insensitive.

Your most recent Find criteria are saved and will automatically be loaded the next time you access the Find screen.

Examples:

For these examples, assume that the Customer table is made up of three records containing one field, called FirstName. The values in this field are Fred, Frederick, and Sam.

Example

Table Field Value

Customer FirstName Fred

Whole

Word Only

Option

Off

Customer FirstName Fred On

Find

All

Option

Search

Result

Off 2

Fred;

Frederick

Off 1 record:

3 Customer FirstName Mike Off

Fred

On 3

Fred;

Frederick;

Sam

287

InventoryControl Printable Help

18.2 Advanced Find

The Advanced Find screen allows you to search a table in the database using multiple values and logical expressions. This screen is useful when the table you are searching contains a lot of data. You can enter several parameters by which to filter your search.

When you use this screen, you will construct a filter, which limits the information you are searching for to certain parameters.

Using the Advanced Find Screen:

2. Select what you want to search for by clicking on an option in the Find menu. In this example we are going to search for Customers.

Note: If the table you select (Customers, Manufacturers, Items, etc.) contains over 1000 pieces of data, you will automatically be taken to the Advanced Find screen. If you are not automatically taken to the Advanced Find screen, the Find screen will appear.

The Advanced Find screen consists of seven input fields and a Filter Expression panel that displays the resulting filter as you build it. These fields are described below:

 Table is used to select the table you want to search.

 Parenthesis (open and close) can be used to control the order in which criteria will be processed. The inner most pair of parentheses in any filter expression are evaluated first.

 Field is used to select the field in the listed table to be searched.

288

InventoryControl Printable Help

 Operator is a comparison operator used to evaluate an expression.

Comparison Operator

Like

Not Like

Is Null

Is Not Null

Meaning equal not equal greater than or equal greater than less than or equal less than is similar to value is not similar to value no value any value

 Like and Not Like are used for text pattern matching. They can only be used with plain text fields, not with dates. The following characters, used within the text value, have a special meaning for the Like and Not Like operators:

LIKE Operator

(underscore)

Meaning matches any single character matches zero or more characters of any value

Escapes the special characters

(gives them their normal meaning)

Examples

LIKE '_-inch' matches

'2-inch', '3-inch', etc.

LIKE 'Eric W%' matches 'Eric White',

'Eric Williams', etc.

LIKE '\%' matches '%'

LIKE '\\' matches a single '\'

 Value is the information you are searching for. (This may included special characters for the Like or Not Like operators).

 Logical is a Boolean operator that combines one or more filter expressions into a single logical group:

Boolean Operator

AND

Meaning gives you the intersection of two conditions gives you the union of two conditions

289

InventoryControl Printable Help

4. Enter the desired values for the seven Advanced Find fields to construct a filter fragment. For example, assume you make the following selections:

Table - Customer

Field - Address 1

Operator - =

Value - 2205 Anywhere Road

The Customer table will be searched for any instance of 2205 Anywhere Road appearing in the

Address 1 field.

Expression list as shown in the example below: toward the bottom of the list, respectively. To reposition a filter fragment in the Filter Expression panel, click on it, then click either the Move Up or Move Down button.

You may edit a filter fragment by first selecting the fragment in the Filter Expression list. The values of the filter fragment populate the seven input fields. Update any of these fields, then click

Replace to update the selected filter fragment in the Filter Expression list. showing all the records that match your criteria.

All searches are case insensitive.

To search for a specific date, build your filter expression to include a time range of 12:00am to 11:59pm for the given date. For example, the filter expression Date >= 12/25/02 12:00am to

290

InventoryControl Printable Help

12/25/02 11:59pm will return all records that have the date 12/25/02. the

Find

screen.

Chapter 19 – WDT2200

19.1 WDT2200 - Setup the Device

The Wasp WDT2200 Communication Wizard allows you to setup your Wasp WDT2200 PDT for use with

InventoryControl, filter the database to be used on the PDT, and transfer data to and from the PDT.

Note: The WDT2200 must be powered on and connected to the PC's serial port before proceeding.

Setting Up the Device:

of mobile device installed, a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with. If you have only one type, the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen.

The Wasp WDT2200 Communication Wizard screen appears with the Setup WDT2200 tab displayed.

291

InventoryControl Printable Help

3. Click Auto Detect COM Port Settings. A status screen appears as the system is detecting the default settings:

The default settings are:

Parity: None

Baud Rate: 19200

Stop Bits: 1

When the system is finished looking for the settings, they will appear in the fields:

292

InventoryControl Printable Help

4. Normally, you should not have to make changes to the values set by the Auto Detect function, but changes can be made to the COM Port Settings, if necessary:

Specify the Serial Port to which your PDT is connected. The Serial Port drop list will display

COM1 through COMn where 'n' is the highest address found on your system.

Specify the Baud Rate at which your PC is to communicate with the PDT. It is recommended that you use the default value of 19200, reducing the Baud Rate to lesser values only if you encounter difficulty transferring files.

Specify the Parity and Stop Bits for the serial port if it is not defined with the defaults shown above (None and 1, respectively.)

If InventoryControl is not already installed, you will receive the following message:

While it is loading you will see a status bar and the device will beep occasionally.

293

InventoryControl Printable Help

When the install has completed, the following confirmation message will appear:

After the first install of InventoryControl, you can resend the program at any time by connecting the device and clicking the Transfer Program to Mobile Device button.

7. Next you need to create the mobile database. For more information, please refer to the

WDT

2200 - Creating the PDT Database

topic.

19.2 WDT2200 - Creating the PDT Database

After you send the InventoryControl program to your mobile device, you will need to create a mobile version of the database so you can transfer the data from the pc to the mobile device. You will also need to create a new database each time you want to send changes from the PC to the mobile device. Create

PDT Database builds the database that will be transferred to the PDT.

Note: If there are inventory transactions on the PDT which have not yet been transferred to the PC, you should Receive the Data from PDT first. For more information on receiving data from the PDT, please refer to the

WDT2200 - Receiving Data from the PDT

topic. Sending a new database first will result in losing the data on the PDT.

Creating the Database:

1. If you are continuing the setup process, click the Next button at the bottom of the Setup WDT

2200 tab, or click the Create PDT Database tab. (You must send the InventoryControl program to the device before you can send the database.) Please refer to the

WDT 2200 - Setting Up the

Device

topic for more information.

294

InventoryControl Printable Help

If you are creating a database for a device that already has the program, from the

InventoryControl Main Screen, click the Mobility icon. If you have more than one type of mobile device installed, a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with. If you have only one type, the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen.

On the Mobility Menu, select Create Mobile.

The Create PDT Database tab displays:

Filter Records allows you to specify which data will be used to create the PDT database. By filtering the records to include only those that are needed at the PDT, memory is conserved as is the time necessary to do transfers between the PC and the PDT.

The default values, shown above, apply no filtering to your data. All Items will be selected, including those which are not yet in a Location.

If the specified filters produce no eligible Items or Sites, no data will be transmitted to the

PDT when a Send Data to PDT is attempted. An error will display on the PDT to verify/send Data to PDT.

295

InventoryControl Printable Help

the

(Pro and

Enterprise Versions Only)

and Pick Orders

(Pro and Enterprise Versions Only)

to be downloaded to the device, then click OK.

Select the Specify Filter button if you will be limiting the data. Click the Hand icon to access the

Find screen to search for data. The data you select on the Find screen will be entered in the text box for that section and only that data will be sent to the mobile device. Please refer to the

Searching for Information

topic for more information on the Find screen.

Select the Minimally Required checkbox to only send data that is required for normal operation.

For example, if you select to send all Items, but don't want to send all locations, only those locations designated as Primary Locations for individual items will be sent. Or, if you don't want to send all Suppliers, but some Suppliers are entered on the Item screen/Managing Suppliers

tab for items, only those suppliers entered on the Item screen will be sent.

Tips for Filtering Information

The default values apply no filtering to your data. All Items will be selected, including those which are not yet in a Location.

Site:

Source: Specify <all> or one of the Sites listed in the drop down list. This determines which Sites will be shown in the Source Site list on the WDT2200.

This is the Site for all inventory transactions to be performed by the device. If you want the device's database to include Items at more than one Site, select <all>.

You can only select ALL or 1 specific site. For example, if you have 5 sites, you cannot select 2 to be a Source. You can either select 1 or all.

Destination: If more than one Site is defined on the system and you have selected a specific Site in the Source Site field, you can select one of the Sites listed in the

Destination drop down list. This determines which Sites will be shown in the Destination

Site list of the WDT2200 Site Configuration function and which locations will be listed in the Move To list.

This field will be grayed-out with a value of <all>, as shown above, if only one Site is defined in InventoryControl or if a value of <all> has been specified for the Source

Site. If a specific Site has been selected for the Source Site, that same site will be the default value for Destination Site, but you can change the Destination Site to a different value using the drop down list.

Source Site: Destination

Site:

The Source

Sites Listed in the WDT2200

Site

Configuration

will Include:

The

Destination

Sites Listed in the

WDT2200

Site

Configuration

will Include:

296

InventoryControl Printable Help

<all>

This value is forced to <all> when there is only one Site setup in the system.

A Specific

Site

A Specific

Site

This value is forced to <all> when <all> is specified as the Source

Site.

Destination

Site is the

Same as the

Source Site

A Different

Site

All Sites

The Specified

Source Site

The Specified

Source Site

All Sites

The Same

Site

The Specified

Destination

Site

As an example, if you have more than two Sites and want to be able to move inventory from Site 1 to Site 2 -and- from Site 1 to Site 3 on the mobile device, you will have to create a mobile database for Source Site 1 and Destination Site 2, transfer the database to the mobile device, use the device for those Moves, send the information back to the PC, then repeat the entire process beginning with by creating a second database to do Moves from Source Site 1 to Destination Site 3.

Alternately, if your device has enough memory to hold a database containing records for all of your Items, at all Sites, you can specify a Source value of <all> and then control Source Site and Destination Site on the mobile device (see WDT2200 -

Site Configuration for more information.

Location:

From: Specify <all> or use <More> from the drop list to find a specific Location at the

Source Site that denotes the first in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database. The last 10 Locations used will be also be listed in the From drop list.

Specifying <all> will include all Locations for the specified Source Site in the mobile

Database.

To: Specify <all> or click the Hand icon to find a specific Location at the Source Site that denotes the last in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database. The last 10 Locations used will also be listed in the To drop list.

Specifying <all> will include all Locations for the specified Destination Site in the mobile Database.

A specific value can be used for From even though <all> is used for To: (For example,

From: Bin 50 used with To: <all>, would select Bin 50 through whatever the largest Bin number is.)

Similarly, a specific value can be used for To in combination with From: <all>. (For example, From: <all> used with To: Bin 100, would select every bin up through Bin 100.)

Item Number:

297

InventoryControl Printable Help

From: Specify <all> or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the first valid value in a range of Item Numbers. The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the From drop list.

Include Items not in a Location: This is an option that is turned on and grayed-out when no filtering is applied. When filtering is applied in one or more of the above fields, this option becomes user-controllable. It allows you to include in the mobile database Items which are not yet in a Location, in addition to those selected via the filters specified. (This can be employed when you expect to use the mobile device to Add quantity for Items that have never been inventoried before. The mobile device user can specify previously defined Locations or create new Locations while adding the previously "Location-less" Items.)

To: Specify <all> or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the last valid value in a range of Item Numbers. The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the To drop list. creating the PDT database.

Several status bars will be displayed as the PDT database is created. Depending on the filter criteria, the database may take several minutes to create.

If you have not yet created any Location, Supplier or Item data in InventoryControl, or your

Filter Records criteria exclude all the data, you will receive the following message:

"Create PDT database completed. The criteria entered has resulted in no items being

selected for the mobile databse. Please click Back button to modify the criteria and try

again."

If the above message is displayed, click OK and then the Back button to restart the Filter

Records dialog. Finish creating your PC database before attempting another transfer to the

PDT.

298

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. Click database you just created to the device.

Click Back to restart the Filter Records dialog.

Click Cancel if you want to avoid transferring the newly created PDT database to the PDT at this time. The Create PDT Database screen will close. The database you just created for the PDT can still be transferred later.

6. You are now ready to send the database to the PDT. For more information, please refer to the

WDT2200 - Sending Data to the PDT

topic.

19.3 WDT2200 - Sending Data to PDT

The Send Data to PDT function is used to transfer data from the PC to the PDT. You will need to create the mobile database first on the Create PDT Database tab before using this function. For more information on creating the database, please refer to the

WDT2200 - Creating the PDT Database

topic.

Sending Data to the PDT:

1. If you are continuing the setup process, click the Next button at the bottom of the Create PDT

Database tab, or click the PC to Mobile Device tab. (You must create the mobile database before you can send it to the device.) Please refer to the

WDT 2200 - Creating the PDT

Database

topic for more information.

299

InventoryControl Printable Help

If you are creating a database for a device that already has the program, from the

InventoryControl Main screen, click the Mobility icon. If you have more than one type of mobile device installed, a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with.

If you have only one type, the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen.

On the Mobility Menu, select Send Data To.

The PC to Mobile Device tab displays:|

300

InventoryControl Printable Help

If the specified filters produce no eligible Items or Sites, no data will be transmitted to the PDT when a Send Data to PDT is attempted.

2. Make sure the WDT2200 is connected to the PC and powered on, then click the Next button on the PC screen to proceed.

Note: If you click the Next button while still logged in on the PDT, the PC screen will prompt you to log out of InventoryControl on the PDT before proceeding.

After clicking Next, the PC will transfer the database to the PDT:

301

InventoryControl Printable Help

When finished transferring the data, the following message will be displayed on the PC:

302

InventoryControl Printable Help

Having received both the InventoryControl program and a database, the PDT will now display the logon screen:

InventoryControl

User:

Password

F1-About

Once you've entered values for User and Password, you'll be able to perform against the downloaded database.

4. After performing inventory transactions on the PDT, you can retrieve them on the

Mobile Device to PC

tab. or

Click Finish now to close this dialog and return to the InventoryControl Main Menu. or

Click the Back button to restart the Send Data to PDT dialog.

303

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.4 WDT2200 - Receiving Data from PDT

The Receive Data from PDT function is used to transfer data from the PDT to the PC.

Receiving Data from the PDT:

1. If you are continuing the setup process, click the Next button at the bottom of the Create PDT

Database tab, or click the PC to Mobile Device tab. (You must create the mobile database before you can send it to the device.) Please refer to the

WDT 2200 - Creating the PDT

Database

topic for more information.

If you are creating a database for a device that already has the program, from the

If you have only one type, the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen.

On the Mobility Menu, select Retreive Data From.

The Receive Data from PDT function can be accessed via the Mobile Devices > PDT > WDT2200 >

Receive Data from PDT menu item:

304

InventoryControl Printable Help

The following conditions must be true before proceeding:

 The WDT2200 must be powered on and connected to the PC's serial port.

 The InventoryControl Log On screen must be displayed on the PDT. Logout if the PDT is still running the InventoryControl program.

If you attempt to Receive Data From PDT while InventoryControl is running on the PDT, you will receive a message that you need to logout of the program on the PDT, then try again.

After logging out of inventoryControl on the PDT, click the Back button to restart the dialog.

Click the Next button to start the transfer.

If no inventory transactions were performed on the PDT since the last time data was transferred to or from the PDT, the following message will be displayed:

If transactions were received from the PDT successfully, you will receive a confirmation message.

Click Finish to close this dialog and return to InventoryControl or

Click the Mobile Device to PC tab or the Back button to restart the dialog if you want to receive data from another PDT.

305

InventoryControl Printable Help

When finished transferring data from one or more PDT's, proceed to Upload From Mobile Devices.

306

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.5 WDT2200 - Data Cycle

WDT2200's should be set first, then

Setup Device

is used to define COM

Port settings prior to transferring the InventoryControl program.

Send Program to PDT

transfers the InventoryControl program to the PDT.

Create PDT Database

builds a database for the PDT that can contain all the data in the PC

database or a subset of the PC's records (via the Filter Records dialog.)

Send Data to PDT

sends the InventoryControl database to the PDT.

Use the PDT

. With both the InventoryControl program and the PDT database transferred to the

PDT, the PDT User can now use the PDT for Add, Remove, Move, Adjust, Details, Receive (Pro and Enterprise Version only), Pick (Pro and Enterprise Version onlyl) or Audit transactions (when

Audit Mode is active).

Receive Data from PDT

transfers all the PDT transactions to the PC along with any new

Customers, Suppliers or Locations the PDT User has created.

Upload From Mobile Devices

allows you to select and validate data for upload into the

InventoryControl database. If you make mistakes on the PDT the data can be modified before being accepted into the PC database.

Steps 1 and 2 are typically done only once per PDT. From then on, steps 3 through 7 might be repeated multiple times.

19.6 WDT2200 - Logging On

When you turn on the device loaded with InventoryControl, the screen will appear as follows:

InventoryControl

Users:

Password:

Key in a valid User and Password for this PDT, pressing the Enter key after each.

InventoryControl PC Users who have the appropriate security settings can log on to any InventoryControl

PDT.

Successful log on will take you to the PDT Main Menu.

307

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.7 WDT2200 - Resetting the Device

The following steps can be performed to clear all data from the WDT2200.

Any inventory transactions not yet uploaded to the PC will be lost if the PDT is reset per the following instructions:

1) Power off the WDT2200 by pressing and holding the power on the screen.

2) With the WDT2200 powered off...

key until no text is displayed

...hold down the CMD and left-arrow keys, then press the power key.

The Start Menu will be displayed:

If you do not see the Start Menu shown above, power off the PDT and repeat the key sequence described above.

3) From the Start Menu, select 3. COLD START by pressing the 3 key on the PDT.

4) Respond with 1=YES to delete all data by pressing the 1 key on the PDT. The WDT2200 will be Cold Started and all data will be lost.

308

InventoryControl Printable Help

At the PC, with the WDT2200 connected to your PC and powered on, you must now perform a

Setup

Device on the PC, to set your COM Port Settings and then

Send Program to PDT before you can proceed

Create PDT Database

309

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.8 WDT2200 - Setting the Date and Time

If the InventoryControl program and a database have already been transferred to the WDT2200, the

InventoryControl Log On screen will be displayed when you first power on the PDT:

InventoryControl

User:

Password:

If the WDT2200 displays the screen above when powered on, jump to Instructions for Setting Date and

Time on a WDT2200 That Already Has InventoryControl Installed.

-OR-

If InventoryControl has not yet been loaded to the WDT2200, the default power-on prompt will be displayed, showing the ROM version and memory capacity:

Instructions for Setting Date and Time on a Cold Started WDT2200:

1) Press and hold the Command key until the following system menu is displayed:

2) Press the 8 key to select 8.SET

3) Press the 1 key to select 1.DATE & TIME

4) Overwrite the Date shown with today's date in the format mm-dd-yyyyy. You can use the right-arrow key to correct any entry errors or press the Enter and advance to setting the Time of Day.

key to accept the current date

5) Overwrite the Time shown with the current time of day in the format hh-mm-ss using values of

0 through 12 for Midnight through Noon and 13 through 23 for the hours of 1:00 PM through 11:00

PM.

6) Press the 5 key to select 5.EXIT

310

InventoryControl Printable Help

7) Press the Escape prompt.

key to exit the system menu and return to the default power-on

You should now perform the Setup Device function to load the InventoryControl program to your

WDT2200.

Instructions for Setting Date and Time on a WDT2200 That Already Has InventoryControl Installed:

1) If the InventoryControl Main Menu is currently displayed:

select 8-LOGOUT to exit to the InventoryControl Log On screen:

InventoryControl

User:

Password:

2) From the Log On screen, power off the WDT2200 by pressing and holding the power until no text is displayed on the screen.

3) With the WDT2200 powered off...

key

...hold down the CMD and left-arrow keys, then press the power key.

A START MENU will be displayed:

311

InventoryControl Printable Help

If you do not see the Start Menu shown above, power off the PDT and repeat the key sequence described above.

4) From the Start Menu, select 2. WARM START by pressing the 2 key on the PDT.

5) The default power-on prompt will be displayed, showing the ROM version and memory capacity:

Press and hold the Command key until the following system menu is displayed:

6) Press the 8 key to select 8.SET

7) Press the 1 key to select 1.DATE & TIME

8) Overwrite the Date shown with today's date in the format mm-dd-yyyyy.

You can use the right-arrow key to correct any entry errors or press the Enter the current date and advance to setting the Time of Day. key to accept

9) Overwrite the Time shown with the current time of day in the format hh-mm-ss using values of

0 through 12 for Midnight through Noon and 13 through 23 for the hours of 1:00 PM through 11:00

PM.

10) Press the 5 key to select 5.EXIT

11) Press the 1 key to select 1.RUN from the system menu.

12) Use the left- and right-arrow keys, if necessary to select MI3WDT.EXE from the list of programs installed on the WDT2200.

312

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press the Enter key when the screen above is displayed:

The InventoryControl Log On screen will then be displayed, allowing you to continue operations with the new date and time settings.

19.9 WDT2200 - Main Menu

The InventoryControl WDT2200 PDT Main Menu (not in Audit Mode):

1-Add

2-Remove

3-Move

4-Adjust

5-Details

6-Site Config

7-Logout

8-Receive

9-Pick

0-About

Press the appropriate number key on the PDT to perform that function.

To Logout, press the 8 key. You will be returned to the Log On screen.

The Audit function is disabled when InventoryControl is not in Audit Mode.

The WDT2200 PDT Main Menu in Audit Mode:

Audit Mode

1-Audit

2-Details

3-Site Config

4-About

8-LOGOUT

Press the appropriate number key on the PDT to perform that function.

To Logout, press the 8 key. You will be returned to the Log On screen.

The Add, Remove, Move and Adjust functions are disabled when in Audit Mode.

313

19.10 WDT2200 - Interface

InventoryControl Printable Help

The Wasp WDT2200 Keypad

 Press and hold the power

key to turn the unit On or Off.

 Press and release the Alpha

key to toggle between Alphabetic and Numeric input.

Cursor style in Alphabetic mode:

_

Cursor style in Numeric mode:

☐

 Double- or triple-tap an alphabetic key to obtain the second or third character.

 Use the Space

key to input a blank space.

 Use the Clear

key to backspace over a character entered in error.

 Press and release the CMD characters shown in yellow.

key just prior to accessing any of the secondary functions or

 Press the large yellow Scan for an inventory transaction.

key to activate the bar code scanner when input is needed

314

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.11 WDT2200 - About Screen

The About screen can be accessed by selecting the 7 key on the PDT Main Menu or the 4 key when the

PDT is in

Audit Mode

About displays the current User, the device's Serial Number, and the current state of the Allow Negative

Quantities on Mobile Devices option.

InventoryControl

Wasp Barcode

Technologies

Build #:

User:

Allow Negative:

ESC=Exit

Allow Negative: T (True) indicates that the User is allowed to Remove or Move more quantity than is shown in Details for that Item. This option is set on the Options screen on the PC. For more information on this option, please refer to the Options Screen topic.

Allow Negative: F (False) indicates that Remove and Move transactions are limited to the quantity shown in Details for that Item.

Press the Escape key to return to the Main menu.

19.12 WDT2200 - Site Configuration

When data for multiple Sites has been included in the mobile database, the WDT 2200's Site Config screen allows the PDT User to specify which of those Sites is to be used for inventory transactions he or she is about to perform.

The Source Site will determine the locations available in the Location field of the Add, Remove, Adjust and Audit functions. It will also determine the locations available in the From: location field of the Move function.

The Destination Site will determine the locations available in the Move function's To: location field.

No inventory transactions can be performed on the PDT until Source and Destination Sites have been selected in Site Config. This must be done at least once following after sending a new mobile database to the device.

315

InventoryControl Printable Help

Configuring Sites:

3 key if the PDT is in Audit Mode.

Site Config

Source/Dest Site

*(Select)

F1=Src F2=Dest

ESC=Menu

Source Site:

Warehouse 1

Press Ent to accept.

ESC to cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Above, the site WAREHOUSE 1 can be accepted as the Source Site by pressing the to accept the value. or

Press the F4 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database. or

Press the F1 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database. or

Press the Escape key to cancel.

When a Source Site is selected, a screen similar to the one below will appear:

Site Config

Source/Dest Site

*Warehouse 2

*(Select)

F1=Src F2=Dest

ESC=Menu

Dest Site:

316

key

InventoryControl Printable Help

Warehouse 3

Press Ent to accept,

ESC to cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Above, the site WAREHOUSE 3 can be accepted as the Destination Site by pressing the ENT key to accept the value. or

Press the F4 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database. or

Press the F1 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database. or

Press the ESC key to cancel.

4. Use Main Menu if you are done making your Site selections.

Note: In this example, the Source and Destination Sites are different. Every inventory transaction will be for Items at the Source Site's Locations except for Moves, where the To Locations will be limited to those at the Destination Site: All Moves will be from Warehouse 2 locations to Warehouse 3 locations.

Had Warehouse 2 been selected as both the Source Site and the Destination Site, all Moves would be from locations within Warehouse 2 to other locations within Warehouse 2.

19.13 WDT2200 - Adding Inventory

The Add function is used to add quantity to any item defined in the PDT database.

Notes:

 Adds can also be done at the PC.

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

 If Source and/or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT, the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT:

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

317

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

The following topics discussed in this section are:

Adding Inventory

Looping on Item Number

Looping on a Track By

Tips for Speeding Up Data Entry

Adding Inventory:

Add

Item #:

123

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Add

Item #:

9999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown above.

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the

Item #.

318

InventoryControl Printable Help

1. Scan or key in a Location value. The Location field is required for all Add transactions.

Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field.

Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen.

Add

123

Monitor

Location:

Warehouse1

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

2. If you press F4 to advance to the Supplier field, without first providing a Location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key

in location

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value.

If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database, press the ESC key to cancel, then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config. If the

Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site,

InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site. Select a different

Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

When a Location value has been entered, press F4 to advance to the next required field.

Add

123

Monitor

Supplier:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

3. PO and Supplier values might be required for this Item # if track bys were set when the item was created. If not, the fields can be left empty or values may be entered optionally. For more information on Track by fields, please refer to the topic

Creating New Items

Press F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

Supplier:

ACME

New entry. Press ENT to accept or ESC to cancel.

Ent=OK

319

InventoryControl Printable Help

ESC=Cancel

As shown above, if you enter a Location or Supplier that's not currently in the PDT database, you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database. The currently selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location.

Location or Supplier.

Add

123

Monitor

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in the inventory quantity being added and press Enter to complete the Add transaction. The

Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero.

NO TRACK BY FIELDS: If this Item does not have enabled for the Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one above will be shown, prompting the entry of Qty.

TRACK BY FIELDS: If this Item does have enabled for Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one below will be shown, expecting input for each Tracked By field that's enabled. In this example, Date Code is required for this item:

Add

123

Monitor

Date Code:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields, pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first inputting a required Tracked By value, a screen similar to the following will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Date Code

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value (a Date

Code, in this example).

320

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item, the Qty field will be set to 1. A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number. Looping will determine the final count for this Add transaction, as you scan (or key in) one or more Serial Numbers for this Item:

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Add screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Add for this

Item:

Add

123

Monitor

Location:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Add for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Add. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a Qty of 10 were entered, this screen is ready to receive inputs for

321

InventoryControl Printable Help

another Add. PO, Supplier and Tracked By values, if any, for this second Add will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop, if any.

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Add are values for Qty and Location. The Total

Qty field is incremented each time an Add is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Add transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Add

Item #:

*

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Add:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Add. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Add transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

322

InventoryControl Printable Help

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time an Add is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Add transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an Add for this Item:

Add

123

Monitor

Pallet:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Add for this Item #, for more than one Pallet.

Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Add:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

Add, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Add. Item #, Location, PO and Supplier values for this second Add will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop.

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Add are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time an Add is submitted while looping.

323

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press the ENT key to submit the Add transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on a Tracked By field, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be restarted.

Tips for Speeding Up Data Entry:

 When you create a new item, if the Category, Manufacturer, UOM or any combination of pinnable fields will be used on a large number of items, create one item with those fields, then pin the fields. Now, the information will be retained in those fields so you don't have to keep re-entering it for each new item.

 Make sure you have the Close New Forms option turned off (on the InventoryControl Options screen) so the New Item screen, or any other screen where new information is added, stays open after each new item is saved.

324

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.14 WDT2200 - Details Screen

The Details function is used to display Location and Quantity information for any Item in the PDT's database for the Sites selected in Site Configuration.

Details is an abbreviated version of the functionality available in the PC's Inventory List.

Note: Source and/or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT, the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the

PDT:

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function.

For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

WDT2200 - Configuring

Sites

19.14.1 Viewing Details for Items with Tracked By options disabled:

if the PDT is in Audit Mode. The screen shown below appears:

Details

Item #:

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

2. Press the PDT's ENT key after supplying an Item # or press the PDT's ESC key to return to the

Main Menu.

If the Item # you enter is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown below:

Details

Item #:

9999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and perss

Ent. ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

325

InventoryControl Printable Help

Details

100007

Monitor

Location:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

advance to the next data entry field. or

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field. or

Press ESC to cancel the transaction and return to the previous screen.

If you press F4 to advance without first providing a Location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Location

ESC=Exit

Press Esc to return and enter Location.

When a Location value has been entered, the screen will appear as shown below:

1000007

Monitor

Total Qty

626.00000

ENT=OK F4=Next

Details first reports the Item's Total Qty across all Locations at every Site.

1000007

Loc: 1

Qty at Loc:

500.0000

TrackBy Qty:

0.0000

F1=Prev ENT=OK

326

InventoryControl Printable Help

In the example shown above, Qty at Loc has a value of 500.00000, showing that 500 of the 626

Total Qty are at Location 1. The TrackBy Qty is 0.00000 because no Tracked By options are enabled,entered or valid for this Item #.

19.14.2 Viewing Details for Items with One or More Tracked By Options Enabled:

When a Location value has been entered for an Item # that has one or more Tracked By options enabled, you will be given the opportunity to narrow the Details display by entering values for any of the

Tracked By fields displayed on the consecutive screens. Press F4 to advance to each field.

If an item has all four Tracked By options enabled, all are available for inputting values which you can use to limit the TrackBy Qty that will shown in the Details display.

Input fields will only be displayed for those Tracked By options that are enabled for the Item specified. if the PDT is in Audit Mode. The screen shown below appears:

Details

Item #:

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

2. Press the PDT's ENT key after supplying an Item # or press the PDT's ESC key to return to the

Main Menu.

If the Item # you enter is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown below:

Details

Item #:

9999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and perss

Ent. ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

Details

10067

Mouse

Pallet:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

327

InventoryControl Printable Help

In the example above, the Item # specified has the Tracked By Pallet option enabled. Having previously supplied the Item # and a Location, the can supply a Pallet number, but doing so is optional.

Values you specify here will limit the TrackBy Qty shown on the Details display to some number less than or equal to the Qty value shown for the specified Location. Use of these fields is optional. If they are left blank, TrackBy Qty will equal Qty at Loc in the Details display.

In the example below, having specified a value for the Tracked By field Pallet, in addition to

Location, Details is reporting a Qty at Loc of 17.00000 and a TrackBy Qty for the specified

Pallet of 4.00000.

10067

LOC: AISLE 1

Qty at Loc:

17.00000

TrackBy Qty:

4.00000

F1=Prev ENT=OK

If the TrackBy Qty is zero for an Item that has one or more Tracked By options enabled, no quantity matching the TrackBy values you just specified exists for the Item at the specified

Location. or

Press F1 to return to the previous field. or

Press the Enter key to return to the Details function for another query.

328

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.15 WDT2200 - Adjusting Inventory

The Adjust function allows you to modify the quantity of existing items. Adjust is like a "mini" Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO (First In First Out) to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here. The Adjust function is useful if too much or too little quantity is accidentally entered for an item (on a mobile device, for example), inventory is lost, found, broken, etc. and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item. Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the Audit function makes other functions of the software, such as adding inventory, unavailable to ensure inventory is not added or removed while you are doing the counts. All features are still available when adjusting inventory.

The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only. Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings.

Notes:

 An item tracked by Serial Number which has been Checked-Out can not be Adjusted.

 Inventory adjustments can also be made at the PC using the Adjust screen.

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

 Source and/or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT, the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT:

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

The following topics are covered in this section:

Adjusting Inventory

Looping on Item Number

Looping on a Track By (other than Serial Number)

329

InventoryControl Printable Help

Adjusting Inventory:

Adjust

Item #:

123

Scan or key in value and press

Ent. Press ESC for Menu.

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown below.

Adjust

Item #:

99999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

ESC=Menu.

If the Item # entered is found in the PDT's database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

3. Scan or key in a Location value. If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's

Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

Adjust

100007

Monitor

Location:

AREA 2

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

The Location field is required for all Adjust transactions.

4. After entering a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field. or

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field. or

330

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first providing a Location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Location

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value.

As shown below, if you enter a Location that's not currently in the PDT database, you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database. The currently selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location.

Site:

Warehouse2

New Location:

Area 7

Ent=OK

ESC=Cancel

Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site,

InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site. Select a different

Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

Press the ENT key to accept the new location or the ESC key to cancel the creation of a new

Location.

5. If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one below will be shown, prompting the entry of Qty.

Adjust

100007

Monitor

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in the inventory quantity at this Location and press F4 to complete the Adjust transaction. The

Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than or equal to zero.

If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, screens like the one below will be shown, expecting input for each Tracked By field that's enabled. A Date Code is required for this Item:

331

InventoryControl Printable Help

Adjust

100007

Monitor

Date Code:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields, pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first inputting a required Tracked By value, a screen similar to the following will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Date Code

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value (a Date

Code, in this example).

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item, the Qty field will be set to 1. A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number. Looping will determine the final count for this Adjust transaction, as you scan (or key in) one or more Serial Numbers for this Item:

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Adjust screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

332

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Adjust for this

Item:

Add

123

Monitor

Location:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Adjust for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Adjust. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a Qty of 10 were entered, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Adjust. PO, Supplier and Tracked By values, if any, for this second Adjust will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop, if any.

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Adjust are values for Qty and Location. The Total

Qty field is incremented each time an Adjust is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Adjust transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

333

InventoryControl Printable Help

Adjust

Item #:

*

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Adjust:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Add. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Adjust transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time an Adjust is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Adjust transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an adjust for this Item:

Adjust

123

Monitor

Pallet:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

334

InventoryControl Printable Help

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one adjust for this Item #, for more than one Pallet.

Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first adjust:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first adjust, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another adjust. Item #, Location, PO and Supplier values for this second adjust will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop.

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each adjust are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time an adjust is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the adjust transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

335

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.16 WDT2200 - Auditing Inventory

Audit allows you to count the Quantity of one or more Items in your inventory when in Audit Mode.

Before you can conduct an audit using the mobile device, you must download a new database created while InventoryControl is in audit mode. For more information on turning on the audit mode on the PC, please refer to the topic

Auditing Your Inventory

. For more information on creating the database, please refer to the topic

WDT2200 - Creating the PDT Database

Notes:

 Audits can also be done at the PC.

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

Topics discussed in this section:

Auditing Inventory

selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location.

Looping on Item Number

Looping on Track Bys (Other than Serial Number)

Auditing Inventory:

2. Press the Enter

Menu

key after supplying an Item # or press the ESC key to return to the Main

336

InventoryControl Printable Help

Audit

Item #:

123

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

If the Item # you entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again.

Audit

Item #:

9999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #:

3. Scan or key in a Location value. The Location field is required for all Audit transactions.

Audit

10007

Monitor

Location:

AREA 2

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field. or

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field. or

Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first providing a Location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Location

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value.

As shown below, if you enter a Location that's not currently in the PDT database, you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database. The currently

337

InventoryControl Printable Help

Site:

Warehouse 2

New Location:

Area 7

ENT=OK

ESC=Cancel

If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database, press the ESC key to cancel, then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config. If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site,

InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site. Select a different

Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

Press the ENT key to accept the new value or the ESC key to Cancel the creation of a new

Location.

4. If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one above will be shown, prompting the entry of Qty.

Audit

100007

Monitor

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in the inventory quantity at this Location and press ENT or F4 to complete the Audit transaction. The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than or equal to zero.

If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, screens like the one below will be shown, expecting input for each Tracked By field that's enabled.

Audit

100007

Monitor

Date Code:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields, pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first inputting a required Tracked

By value, a screen similar to the following will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Date Code

ESC=Exit

338

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press Esc to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value (a Date

Code, in this example).

5. When the you are finished doing Audits, even just for an afternoon of counting during a week-long

Audit, the Counts can be uploaded to the PC (please refer to the topic

WDT2200 - Receiving

Data from the PDT

for more information).. Multiple PDTs can upload their counts multiple times throughout the Audit Mode period.

6. When the PC is no longer in Audit Mode, you can create another mobile database to send to the

PDT. This will return the PDT to its normal mode.

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item, the Qty field will be set to 1. A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number. Looping will determine the final count for this Audit transaction, as you scan (or key in) one or more Serial Numbers for this Item:

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Audit screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

339

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Audit for this

Item:

Audit

123

Monitor

Location:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Audit for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Audit. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a Qty of 10 were entered, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Audit. PO, Supplier and Tracked By values, if any, for this second Audit will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop, if any.

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Audit are values for Qty and Location. The Total

Qty field is incremented each time an Audit is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Audit transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

340

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Audit

Item #:

*

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Audit:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Audit. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Audit transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time an Audit is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Audit transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

341

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an Audit for this Item:

Audit

123

Monitor

Pallet:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Audit for this Item #, for more than one Pallet.

Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Audit:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

Audit, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Audit. Item #, Location, PO and Supplier values for this second Audit will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop.

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Audit are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time an Audit is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Audit transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

342

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.17 WDT2200 - Moving Inventory

The Move function allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one Location to another. When you create an item, you can add which locations it may be. When you then add inventory (quantity) to the item, you select in which location that quantity will reside. The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another. By moving inventory in the software, you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located.

Note:

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

 Move transactions can also be performed on the PC's Move screen.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Moving Inventory

Looping on Item Number

Looping on Track Bys (Other than Serial Number)

Moving Inventory:

2. Press the PDT's Enter key after supplying an Item # or press the PDT's ESC key to return to the

Main Menu.

Move

Item #:

123

343

InventoryControl Printable Help

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown below.

Move

Item #:

99999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

3. Scan or key in a From location value.

Move

1000052

Fence-Rail

From:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

The From and To fields are required for all Move transactions.

Enter a From Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field. or

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field. or

Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen.

If you press F4 to advance to the To location field without first providing a From location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key in From

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required From location value.

344

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices Option is disabled on the Options screen, you will receive a warning message if you attempt to Move quantity from a location that does not exist in the PDT database. The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the mobile database. You can check the state of this option on the PDT by viewing the

PDT About screen.

New Source Site From locations can only be created during Move when the Allow Negative

Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled. Please see the

Options Screen

topic for more information on this option.

When a From location value has been entered, press F4 or ENT to advance to the To location field.

4. Provide the required To location value.

Move

1000052

Fence-Rail

To:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

As shown below, if a From or To Location value is entered that's not currently in the database, you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database for the Source or Destination Site shown.

Site:

Warehouse 2

New Location:

Area 2

ENT=OK

ESC=Cancel

If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database at that Site, press ESC to cancel, then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config.

If the From location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source

Site, InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site. Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

Press the ENT key to accept the new value or the ESC key to Cancel the creation of a new

Location.

5. If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one below will be shown, prompting the entry of Qty.

Move

1000052

Fence-Rail

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

345

InventoryControl Printable Help

Key in the inventory Qty being Moved and press F4 or ENT to complete the Move transaction.

The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero.

If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, you will see the following message if you attempt to Move more quantity than that which is available for this Item at the specified From location.

Available:

15.0000

Not enough qty avail able to complete the transaction.

ESC=Exit

Press ESC and enter a value that does not exceed the Available amount.

6. If the Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one below will be shown, expecting input for each Tracked By field that's enabled before entering a value for Qty.

Move

100068

Paint Can

Pallet:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields, pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first inputting a required Tracked

By value, a screen similar to the following will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Pallet

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value (a Pallet, in this example).

Note: If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, any entered

Tracked By value that does not match a value associated with inventory available at the previously specified From location, the following screen display will be displayed:

No item with this tr ackby specific in st ock

ESC=Exit

346

InventoryControl Printable Help

If Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is enabled, any Tracked By value is allowed.

Press ESC to exit the error message and then provide a Tracked By value that matches inventory in stock at the From location.

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Move screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Move for this

Item:

Move

123

Monitor

Location:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

347

InventoryControl Printable Help

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Move for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Add. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a Qty of 10 were entered, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Add. PO, Supplier and Tracked By values, if any, for this second Add will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop, if any.

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Move are values for Qty and Location. The Total

Qty field is incremented each time a Move is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Move transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Move

Item #:

*

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Move:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

348

InventoryControl Printable Help

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Move. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Move transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time an Move is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Move transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an Move for this Item:

Move

123

Monitor

Pallet:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Move for this Item #, for more than one Pallet.

Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Move:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

349

InventoryControl Printable Help

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

Move, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Move. Item #, Location, PO and Supplier values for this second Move will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop.

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Move are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time an Move is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Move transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

350

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.18 WDT2200 - Removing Inventory

The Remove function allows you to remove quantity from any item in the database. Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item. Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity or remove quantity.

Inventory is also removed when you pick items for a Pick Order (

Applies to Pro and Enterprise

Versions only

). For further information on Picking Orders, please refer to the topic

WDT2200 - Picking

Orders

Notes:

 Removes can also be done at the PC using the Remove screen.

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

Topics discussed in this section are:

Removing Inventory

Looping on Item Number

Looping on Track Bys (Other than Serial Number)

Removing Inventory:

Remove

Item #:

123

Scan or key in value

351

InventoryControl Printable Help

and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

2. Press the PDT's Enter to the Main Menu.

key after supplying an Item # or press the PDT's ESC key to return

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown below:

Remove

Item #:

9999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

3. Scan or key in a Location value:

Remove

123

Monitor

Location:

AREA 2

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

The Location field is required for all Remove transactions.

Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field. or

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field. or

Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen.

If you press F4 to advance to the Customer field, without first providing a Location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Location

ESC=Exit

352

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value.

Note: If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, you will see a warning message if you attempt to Remove quantity from a Location that does not exist in the

PDT database. The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database.

You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen.

New Locations can only be created during Remove when the Allow Negative Quantities on

Mobile Devices option is enabled. If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database, press ESC to cancel, then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config. If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site, InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source

Site. Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

Remove

123

Monitor

Customer:

00001

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

A Customer value might be required for this Item #. If not, the Customer field can be left empty or a value may be entered optionally.

As shown below, if a Customer value is entered that's not currently in the PDT database, you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database. The currently selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location.

Customer:

ACME

New entry. Press Ent

To accept or ESC to

Cancel.

ENT=OK

ESC=Cancel

like the one below will be shown, prompting the entry of Qty.

Remove

100007

Paint Can

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

353

InventoryControl Printable Help

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in the inventory quantity being Removed and press ENT to complete the Remove transaction. The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero.

If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, you will see the following message if you attempt to Remove more quantity than that which is available for this

Item at the specified Location.

Available:

83.0000

Not enough qty avail able to complete the transaction

ESC=Exit

Press ESC and enter a value that does not exceed the Available amount.

If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one below will be shown, expecting input for each Tracked By field that's enabled.

Remove

100006

Paint Can

Pallet:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields, pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first inputting a required Tracked

By value, a screen similar to the following will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Pallet

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value (a Pallet, in this example).

If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices options is disabled, and a Tracked By value that does not match a value associated with inventory available at the previously specified

Location is entered, the following screen will be displayed:

No item with this tr ackby specific in st ock

ESC=Exit

If Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is enabled, any Tracked By value is allowed.

354

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press Esc to Exit the error message and then provide a Tracked By value that matches inventory in stock at the specified Location.

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Remove screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing a Remove for this

Item:

Add

123

Monitor

Location:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

355

InventoryControl Printable Help

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Add. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a Qty of 10 were entered, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Add. PO, Supplier and Tracked By values, if any, for this second Remove will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop, if any.

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Location. The

Total Qty field is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Remove

Item #:

*

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Remove:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

356

InventoryControl Printable Help

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Remove. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked

By values just specified will be used with every Remove transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time a Remove is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Remove for this Item:

Remove

123

Monitor

Pallet:

*

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item #, for more than one

Pallet. Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Remove:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

Remove, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Remove. Item #, Location, PO and Supplier values for this second Remove will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop.

357

InventoryControl Printable Help

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

358

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.19 WDT2200 - Removing Kit Items

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

The Remove Kit function allows you to remove a kit item from the database. This can be considered the same as shipping inventory. You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen.

Notes:

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

Topics discussed in this section are:

Removing Kit Items

Looping on Item Number

Looping on Track Bys (Other than Serial Number)

Removing Kit Items:

Remove screen appears

Remove

Item #:

123

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

359

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press ESC for Menu

2. Press the PDT's Enter key after supplying an Item # or press the PDT's ESC key to return to the Main Menu.

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again, as shown below:

Remove

Item #:

9999999

Entry not found.

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

ESC=Menu

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item #.

Remove Kit

123

123 Description

QTY:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

4. Next a screen will appear allowing you to scan or enter the component items for this kit item.

Scan the Item Number, or use the F1/F4 keys or the arrow keys to browse through a list of the component items. Press F2 to clear your selection.

Scan/Select Item #:

1001

Rem Qty: 12

Total Qty: 30

ESC=Cancel Ent= OK

F1/F4 Browse F2=CLR

Rem Qty represents how many Kits you have removed so far and the Total Qty is how many of that component item you have removed. For example, if you have 5 of item 1001 contained in Kit

123, then the Total Qty would be 12 x 5 = 60.

360

InventoryControl Printable Help

5. Scan or key in a Location value (Note: If this is a non-inventory item, you will be taken directly to the Quantity screen - See Step 6):

Remove

123

Item Description

Location:

AREA 2

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

The Location field is required for all Remove transactions.

Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field. or

Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field. or

Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen.

If you press F4 to advance to the next field, without first providing a Location value, the following message will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Location

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value.

Note: If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, you will see a warning message if you attempt to Remove quantity from a Location that does not exist in the

PDT database. The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database.

You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen.

New Locations can only be created during Remove when the Allow Negative Quantities on

Site. Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

361

InventoryControl Printable Help

like the one below will be shown, prompting the entry of Qty.

Remove

100007

Paint Can

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in the inventory quantity being Removed and press ENT to complete the Remove transaction. The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero.

If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, you will see the following message if you attempt to Remove more quantity than that which is available for this

Item at the specified Location.

Available:

83.0000

Not enough qty avail able to complete the transaction

ESC=Exit

Press ESC and enter a value that does not exceed the Available amount.

If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code, Pallet or Lot fields, a screen like the one below will be shown, expecting input for each Tracked By field that's enabled.

Remove

100006

Paint Can

Pallet:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields, pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field.

If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field, without first inputting a required Tracked

By value, a screen similar to the following will be displayed:

Please scan or key in Pallet

ESC=Exit

Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value (a Pallet, in this example).

362

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: You can press the F2 key to view the last Serial Number entered.

If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices options is disabled, and a Tracked By value that does not match a value associated with inventory available at the previously specified

Location is entered, the following screen will be displayed:

No item with this tr ackby specific in st ock

ESC=Exit

If Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is enabled, any Tracked By value is allowed.

Press Esc to Exit the error message and then provide a Tracked By value that matches inventory in stock at the specified Location.

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Remove screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

363

InventoryControl Printable Help

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing a Remove for this

Item:

Add

123

Monitor

Location: *

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Add. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Location. The

Total Qty field is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Remove

Item #: *

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

364

InventoryControl Printable Help

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Remove:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Remove. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked

By values just specified will be used with every Remove transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time a Remove is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Remove for this Item:

Remove

123

Monitor

Pallet: *

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item #, for more than one

Pallet. Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Remove:

365

InventoryControl Printable Help

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

366

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.20 WDT2200 - Picking Inventory for Orders

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

When a pick order is actually being picked, that is, the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer, the quantities that are removed from inventory for each item on the order are entered in the

Pick screen.

Notes:

 Picks can also be done at the PC.

 Manual items cannot be picked on the mobile devices. Please refer to

Creating a Pick Order

for more information on Manual items.

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

The topics discussed in this section are:

Picking Inventory

Looping on Item Number

Looping on Track Bys (Other than Serial Number)

Picking Inventory:

Pick

Order #:

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

367

InventoryControl Printable Help

Press ESC for Menu

Pick

Order #:

00001

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

3. Enter the Item Number you are picking, then press Ent. Press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

Pick

Item #:

1002

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again after you press Ent.

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item # after you press Ent. select a different item.

Pick

1002

Monitor

Location:

001

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

5. Picks are always calculated in Eaches, meaning the quantity in which you stock them (as opposed to the quantity in which they are shipped to you, which may differ). Enter how many of this item you will be picking.

Pick

1002

Monitor

EA.Qty

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

368

InventoryControl Printable Help

Note: If this item has any track bys set (serial number, date code, pallet, etc.), you will required to enter those prior to entering a quantity. If this item is tracked by Serial Number, the quantity is limited to 1.

Press F4 to complete the transaction.

Note: If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled, you will see a warning message if you attempt to Pick quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database. The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database. You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the

PDT About screen.

New Locations can only be created during Pick when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile

Devices option is enabled. If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database, press ESC to cancel, then return to the Main Menu to check

Site Config. If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected

Source Site, InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site.

Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item, the Qty field will be set to 1. A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number. Looping will determine the final count for this Pick transaction, as you scan (or key in) one or more Serial Numbers for this Item:

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number. Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Pick screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

369

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Pick for this

Item:

Pick

123

Monitor

Location: *

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Add. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a Qty of 10 were entered, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick. PO, Supplier and Tracked By values, if any, for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop, if any.

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Location. The Total

Qty field is incremented each time a Pick is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

370

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Pick

Item #: *

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Pick:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Pick. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Pick transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time a Pick is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

371

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Pick for this Item:

Pick

123

Monitor

Pallet: *

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item #, for more than one Pallet.

Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Pick:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

Pick, this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick. Item #, Location, PO and Supplier values for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop.

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Pallet.The

Total Qty is incremented each time an Pick is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

372

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.21 WDT2200 - Picking Kit Items

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only.

Pick screen.

Notes:

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

The topics discussed in this section are:

Picking Inventory

Looping on Item Number

Looping on Track Bys (Other than Serial Number)

Picking Inventory:

Pick

Order #:

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

373

InventoryControl Printable Help

Pick

Order #:

00001

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

3. Enter the Item Number you are picking, then press Ent. Press ESC to return to the Main Menu.

Pick

Item #:

123

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

If the Item # entered is not found in the PDT's database, you will be prompted to try again after you press Ent.

If the Item # entered is found in the database, the Item's Description will be displayed beneath the Item # after you press Ent.

Pick Kit

123

123 Description

Qty:

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

5. Next a screen will appear allowing you to scan or enter the component items for this kit item.

Scan the Item Number, or use the F1/F4 keys to browse through a list of the component items.

Press F2 to clear your selection.

Scan/Select Item #:

1001

Rem Qty: 12

Total Qty: 30

ESC=Cancel Ent= OK

F1/F4 Browse F2=CLR

Rem Qty represents how many Kits you have picked so far and the Total Qty is how many of that component item you have picked. For example, if you have 5 of item 1001 contained in Kit 123, then the Total Qty would be 12 x 5 = 60. Continuing this example, if you pick more than 60, a warning will appear that you are picking more than indicated on the Pick Order. You can

374

InventoryControl Printable Help

continue, but the discrepancy will be caught when you sync that data back to the PC and you will have to correct the quantity on the Edit Transaction screen. select a different item.

Pick

1001

Monitor

Location:

001

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

7. If a track by other than Serial Number is required, you will enter it now.

Pick

1001

Monitor

Date Code:

DC-1234

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

8. Picks are always calculated in Eaches, meaning the quantity in which you stock them (as opposed to the quantity in which they are shipped to you, which may differ). Enter how many of this item you will be picking.

Pick

1001

Monitor

EA.Qty

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

9. If this item is tracked by Serial Number or Lot, you will be required to enter the numbers/codes now.

1001

EA. QTY:1

SN:

100023021

Qty:4/100

F4=Done F2=Last SN

When looping on serial number, note that the Qty field displays how many serial numbers exist for this item and how many you have entered so far. In the example above, 4 serial numbers have been entered out of a possible 100 (4/100). You can press F2 to display the last serial

375

InventoryControl Printable Help

number entered.

10.

Press F4 to complete the transaction.

PDT About screen.

New Locations can only be created during Pick when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile

Devices option is enabled. If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database, press ESC to cancel, then return to the Main Menu to check

Site Config. If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected

Source Site, InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site.

Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that's where you intended to perform this transaction.

Looping on Serial Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key. An asterisk displays next to the looped field.

If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item, the Qty field will be set to 1. A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number. Looping will determine the final count for this Pick transaction, as you scan (or key in) one or more Serial Numbers for this Item:

1000066

Qty:1

SN: *

Count:0

F4=Done F2=Last SN

As each SN is keyed in or scanned, the Count will be increased. Press ENT after inputting each serial number. When looping on serial number, note that the Qty field displays how many serial numbers exist for this item and how many you have entered so far. In the example above, 4 serial numbers have been entered out of a possible 100 (4/100). You can press F2 to display the last serial number entered.

Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Pick screen.

Notes:

 When an Item is tracked by Serial Number, you can only loop on Serial Number.

 When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number, you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping. The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping.

376

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Location:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Pick for this

Item:

Pick

123

Monitor

Location: *

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item #, to more than one

Location. Values entered for Item #, PO and Supplier, if any, will remain locked while looping on

Location after entering them for the first Add. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered.

In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location, PO,

123

Qty:

Location:

Total Qty:

10.00000

F4=Done

While looping on Location, all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Location. The Total

Qty field is incremented each time a Pick is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop.

377

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on Item Number:

Fields can be looped, or pinned, by pressing the F3 key.

In the following example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Item #:

Pick

Item #: *

Scan or key in value and press Ent.

Press ESC for Menu

Above, the asterisk (*) indicates the intention to loop on Item #. Values entered for Location, PO,

Supplier and any Tracked By fields (other than Serial Number) will remain locked after entering them for the first Pick:

Qty:

Item #:

Count:25

F4=Done

Above, having pressed F3 when prompted for Item # and then having entered the item number and values for Location, PO, Supplier, any Tracked By's, and a value of 25 for Qty, this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item # inputs for the second Pick. The Location, PO, Supplier, and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Pick transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop.

While looping on Item #, all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item #. The

Count is incremented each time a Pick is done while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

When looping on Item #, all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements. If a different Tracked By field is required, you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing.

Looping will need to be reset.

378

InventoryControl Printable Help

Looping on a Tracked By (other than Serial Number)

Here, for example, F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Pick for this Item:

Pick

123

Monitor

Pallet: *

ESC=Cancel

F1=Prev F4=Next

An asterisk (*) indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item #, for more than one Pallet.

Values entered for Item #, Location, PO, Supplier, and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet, after entering them for the first Pick:

123

Qty:

Pallet: *

Total Qty:

30.00000

F4=Done

Above, having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first

While looping on this Tracked By field, all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Pallet.

The Total Qty is incremented each time an Pick is submitted while looping.

Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or

Press the F4 key to exit the loop.

Looping will need to be restarted.

379

InventoryControl Printable Help

19.22 WDT2200 - Receiving Inventory

This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions only.

This screen allows you to select which purchase order you are receiving on and to mark individual items on that purchase order as received into a specific location.

Notes:

 Picks can also be done at the PC.

 Manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices. Please refer to

Creating a Purchase

Order

for more information on Manual items.

 Make sure the PDT's date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions.

Please use the Site

Config function to

Select Source and

Destination Sites.

ESC=Exit

Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu, then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function. For more information on configuring sites on the PDT, please refer to the topic,

The topics discussed in this section are:

Receiving Inventory

Looping on Item Number